JP7587293B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

There are known pachinko gaming machines that display the likelihood of hitting a jackpot (displaying the number of stars) to make it easier to guess the likelihood of hitting a jackpot (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-5617 A

However, the expectation level followed a monotonous pattern: the fewer the number of stars displayed as the expectation level, the lower the expectation level, and the more the number of stars, the higher the expectation level. This left room for improvement in order to increase interest in the game.

In light of this situation, the present invention aims to increase interest in gaming.

The gaming machine according to the present invention comprises an acquisition means for acquiring judgment information when an acquisition condition is established, a judgment means for judging whether or not a special game advantageous to a player is executed based on the judgment information, an advantageous game control means for controlling an advantageous game to which a player can move after the special game ends, a presentation control means for controlling the execution of a presentation, and an operation means operable by a player , wherein the presentation control means is capable of suggesting the possibility of the advantageous game being executed by operating the operation means to derive second numerical information which is increased by a predetermined number from first numerical information, and the second numerical information may include a case where a first number is displayed, a case where a second number greater than the first number is displayed, or a case where a third number greater than the first number and less than the second number is displayed, and when the second number is displayed, The advantageous game is more likely to be executed when the first number is displayed than when the third number is displayed, and the advantageous game is more likely to be executed when the third number is displayed than when the second number is displayed; the presentation control means is capable of notifying whether or not the advantageous game will be executed by operating the operation means after deriving the second numerical information, and when operating the operation means, an operation prompting image is capable of being displayed on the display means, and the operation prompting image includes a first operation prompting image and a second operation prompting image which suggests that the advantageous game is more likely to be executed than the first operation prompting image, and when the third number is displayed as the second numerical information, it is easier to display the second operation prompting image than when the first number is displayed as the second numerical information .

The present invention can increase the interest in playing games.

1 is a front view of the appearance of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a rear view showing the appearance of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a block diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. This figure shows (A-1) a special pattern hit determination table for the first starting hole, (A-2) a special pattern hit determination table for the second starting hole, and (B) a normal pattern hit determination table according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1A is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table, (B) a normal symbol determination table, and (C) details of rounds for each winning special symbol according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. A figure showing a special pattern variation pattern table according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a command table (1/2) according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a command table (2/2) according to an embodiment of the present invention. 5 is a flowchart showing a main control board main process according to the embodiment of the present invention. 5 is a flowchart showing a setting value changing process according to the embodiment of the present invention. 11 is a flowchart showing a setting value confirmation process according to the embodiment of the present invention. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main control board timer interrupt process according to an embodiment of the present invention. 5 is a flowchart showing an input SW detection process according to the embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart showing the processing performed when detecting the first starting hole in an embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart showing the processing performed when a second starting hole is detected in an embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart showing the processing performed when a second large prize opening is detected in an embodiment of the present invention. 11 is a flowchart showing a special symbol-related process according to an embodiment of the present invention. 11 is a flowchart showing the processing at the start of special pattern fluctuation according to an embodiment of the present invention. 11 is a flowchart showing a special symbol winning determination process according to an embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing processing during special pattern fluctuation according to an embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot 1 game processing according to an embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing small win game processing according to an embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart showing the second type jackpot transition control processing according to an embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot 2 game processing according to an embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the performance control board according to the embodiment of the present invention. 10 is a flowchart showing the performance control board timer interrupt processing according to an embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a main command receiving process (1/2) according to the embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a main command receiving process (2/2) according to the embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing a pre-notification decision table 1 (pre-reach pre-notification) for an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a dialogue advance determination table according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a button vibration notice determination table according to an embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing a pre-notification decision table 2 (reach pre-notification) for an embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing (a) a logo preview determination table and (b) a car group preview determination table relating to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing (a) a prediction decision table 3 (prediction during super reach_conversation prediction) according to an embodiment of the present invention, and (b) a diagram showing a prediction decision table 4 (prediction during super reach_cut-in prediction). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing (c) a notice determination table 5 (judgment during super reach) according to an embodiment of the present invention, and (d) a diagram showing a performance button determination table. 1 is a diagram showing an aspect of a dialogue preview according to an embodiment of the present invention; A figure showing the button vibration notification mode of an embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an aspect of a logo preview in an embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an aspect of vehicle group preview in an embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an aspect of a cut-in preview in an embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an aspect of a judge's presentation according to an embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an aspect of conversation preview in an embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an aspect of conversation preview in an embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an aspect of conversation preview in an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a simplified time chart of the variable presentation according to an embodiment of the present invention (normal game state). A figure showing the form of the jackpot entry judgment presentation (judgment during jackpot) during one game of the embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing the mode selection presentation during one jackpot game in an embodiment of the present invention. This is a figure that explains the details of the presentation of small hit game and big hit 2 game when mode A is selected in an embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing the aspects of small hit play and big hit 2 play when mode A is selected in an embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing the mode of the continuation judgment presentation (judgment during jackpot) during jackpot 1 play and jackpot 2 play in an embodiment of the present invention. 11A to 11C are diagrams showing various tables of icon effects according to an embodiment of the present invention. 11A to 11C are diagrams showing various tables of icon effects according to an embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing various tables of icon effects in an embodiment of the present invention, and effect tables during play of jackpot 1 and jackpot 2. A figure showing the presentation table during jackpot 1 play and jackpot 2 play in an embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing the mode selection presentation for each mode in an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the state of each mode during the time-saving game state (state during RUSH) according to an embodiment of the present invention. 11 is a flowchart illustrating a performance status monitoring process according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an overview of the measurement effect during RUSH according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an overview of the measurement effect during RUSH according to an embodiment of the present invention.

The following describes an embodiment of the present invention in detail with reference to the drawings, using a pachinko gaming machine 1 as an example. Note that in the following description, "front," "rear," "left," "right," "upper," and "lower" refer to the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 as seen from the player's side.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko game machine 1 has an outer frame 2 for installation on a game machine installation island (not shown) in an amusement parlor, a middle frame 3 pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and removably holding a game board 6, a glass frame 4 pivotally supported by the middle frame 3 and facing the front of the game board 6, allowing the game board 6 to be viewed through transparent glass, and a tray member 5 pivotally supported by the middle frame 3 and positioned below the glass frame 4, capable of storing game balls.

The middle frame 3 is provided with a launching device for launching the game balls into the game area 7 of the game board 6, and a launching handle 8 for making the launching device perform a launching operation. The launching handle 8 is held by the player and can be rotated within a predetermined range, and the launch strength when launching the game balls into the game area 7 can be adjusted depending on the amount of rotation (volume). For example, when the launching handle 8 is rotated by a first rotation amount (in the case of a first launch strength), the game ball is launched to the left side of the game area 7 (game area 7a) (so-called "left shot" is possible), and when the launching handle 8 is rotated by a second rotation amount larger than the first rotation amount (in the case of a second launch strength), the game ball is launched to the right side of the game area 7 (game area 7b) (so-called "right shot" is possible). The game area 7a forms a predetermined path, and the game area 7b forms a specific path.

The launch handle 8 is provided with a handle touch sensor (not shown). This handle touch sensor turns ON when the player is holding the launch handle 8, and the ON signal is input to the payout control board 300. This makes it possible to know that the launch handle 8 is being held by the player.

A light-emitting device 9 (lamp, LED, etc.) is provided in the glass frame 4, and can decorate the pachinko gaming machine 1 by emitting light. For example, when a special symbol is determined to be a hit in the special symbol hit determination process described below, the light can be emitted in rainbow colors to notify the player that a special symbol has been hit.

The light-emitting device 9 includes a performance button LED provided on the performance button 14. The performance button LED is provided inside the performance button 14, and is covered from above with a transparent cover body so that the light-emitting mode can be seen. For example, the performance button LED can emit light in white, blue, green, red, and rainbow colors.

A speaker 10 is provided in the glass frame 4 (upper part), and is capable of outputting music (BGM), voice, and sound effects. For example, when the normal game state (described later) is controlled, music corresponding to the normal game state can be output, and when the time-saving game state (described later) is controlled, music corresponding to the time-saving game state can be output. A lower speaker 10 is provided in the glass frame 4 (lower part), and is capable of outputting voice and sound effects. A speaker lamp (not shown) is provided in the lower speaker 10, and is configured to emit light during the winning flash performance described later.

The light-emitting device 9 and speaker 10 are capable of issuing an abnormality alert when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the light-emitting device 9 can emit light in a lighting pattern specifically designed for abnormality alerts, and the speaker 10 can output a voice or warning sound that alerts the user to the specific details of the abnormality.

The tray member 5 is composed of an upper tray 5a and a lower tray 5b, and when the amount of game balls stored in the upper tray 5a exceeds a certain amount, the game balls are dispensed into the lower tray 5b. The tray member 5 is also provided with a ball removal button 11 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper tray 5a into the lower tray 5b at the end of a game, a ball lending button 12 for requesting the payout of game balls from a game ball lending device (not shown), a card return button 13 for requesting the return of a valuable medium (prepaid card, membership card) inserted into the insertion port of the game ball lending device, a balance display section 12a for displaying the remaining balance of the valuable medium, and a ball lending available lamp 12b for notifying that ball lending is possible by operating the ball lending button 12.

The tray member 5 is also provided with an effect button 14 and an effect lever 15 that can be operated by the player when an operation promotion effect is executed to encourage the player to operate each operating means. Note that the effect button 14 and the effect lever 15 may be provided independently of each other, or may be provided as an integrated unit.

In addition, a vibration device may be provided on one or both of the effect button 14 and the effect lever 15 to vibrate them. For example, they may be vibrated as a notice effect, or may be vibrated to notify a transition to a big win game or a small win game (described later). Note that only one of the effect button 14 and the effect lever 15 may be provided, or multiple of either may be provided.

In addition, the effective operation time of the effect lever 15 may be set at the same time as the effective operation time of the effect button 14, or vice versa. For example, if the effect lever 15 is operated in a scene where the operation of the effect button 14 is encouraged, it may be determined that an operation input of the effect lever 15 has been made, and the corresponding effect may be executed.

The tray member 5 is also provided with a cross key button 16 that can be operated by the player to adjust the volume of the music (BGM), voice, and sound effects output from the speaker 10, adjust the amount of light emitted from the light-emitting device 9, select a mode (described below), and activate a menu screen to perform operations corresponding to each menu. Note that the cross key button 16 serves as an operating device for selecting a mode and performing operations related to the menu screen, and a dedicated operating device for adjusting the volume and light amount may also be provided separately and independently.

A decorative portion 2a is provided at the upper end of the outer frame 2. This decorative portion 2a extends further upward from the upper end of the outer frame and is shaped, for example, to resemble a character, making for a visually impactful effect. On the other hand, the components (for example, an external information display) located behind the decorative portion 2a may be difficult for some players to see. The decorative portion 2a may always extend upward from the upper end of the outer frame 2, or may be configured to change from a stored state to an extended state when a specified trigger occurs.

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIG. 2. On the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various control boards such as the main control board 100, the performance control board 200, the payout control board 300 and the payout device 304, and the power supply board 400 are provided (to be precise, these various control boards are attached to the rear side of the middle frame 3).

The main control board 100 is also provided with a RAM clear switch 105. The RAM clear switch 105 is a switch for initializing game information that is rewritten as games are played in the area of the main RAM 103. For example, if the game arcade closes while the game is still in the time-saving game mode, the manager (e.g., game arcade employee) can turn the power on while pressing the RAM clear switch 105 to clear the game information in the time-saving game mode, and the game can be restarted in the normal game mode when the arcade opens the next day.

The RAM clear switch 105 is also a switch for switching the setting value in the setting change state described below. Details will be described later in the flowchart, but for example, in the case of six setting values, when the setting value "1" is displayed on the display 104 described below, pressing the RAM clear switch 105 once switches the setting value from "1" to "2", and when the RAM clear switch 105 is pressed once again, the setting value switches from "2" to "3", and thereafter, each time the RAM clear switch 105 is pressed once, the setting value switches to "4", "5", and "6", and when the setting value "6" is displayed on the display 104, pressing the RAM clear switch 105 once switches the setting value from "6" to "1".

Although the RAM clear switch 105 is provided on the main control board 100, it may be provided on the power supply board 400 or directly on the inner frame 3, for example, as long as it can be input to the main control board 100.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a setting change keyhole 31 (also referred to as a setting key SW in this embodiment). The setting change keyhole 31 is used when setting one of the multiple setting value stages described below. Specifically, when a setting change key (not shown) managed by a gaming parlor staff member is inserted into the setting change keyhole 31 and rotated 90 degrees clockwise (rotating from vertical to horizontal), and the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned ON (power SW 400a is turned ON) while pressing the above-mentioned RAM clear switch 105, the setting change state in which a setting value can be set is entered. Details of the setting change state will be described later in the flow chart.

The setting change keyhole 31 is also used to check the currently set setting values. Specifically, when a setting change key managed by a store clerk is inserted into the setting change keyhole 31 and rotated 90 degrees clockwise (from vertical to horizontal), and the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned ON (power SW 400a is turned ON), the machine enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values can be checked. Details of the setting confirmation state will be described later in the flow chart.

The setting change keyhole 31 can be rotated by the setting change key, and for example, the main CPU 101 can detect three positions (states): a vertical position, a horizontal position, and a diagonal position. Note that although the setting change keyhole 31 is provided on the main control board 100, the location of the installation is not limited to this. For example, the setting change keyhole 31 may be provided on the middle frame 3.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a display 104. If the display 104 is in a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, the setting value is displayed, and if the display 104 is not in a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, the display 104 displays game performance information calculated, for example, using the formula "(number of paid-out balls in normal game state ÷ number of balls out in normal game state) × 100".

When the game performance information is not in a setting change state or setting confirmation state (for example, when timer interrupt processing is permitted to be executed), it is calculated at each interrupt (for example, every 4 ms), and the current section and the past three sections (the previous section, the second section, and the third section) can be displayed at each specified display timing (for example, every 5 seconds). In other words, the display is switched as follows: display of the current section → predetermined time has elapsed (5 seconds has elapsed) → display of past section (1) → predetermined time has elapsed (5 seconds has elapsed) → display of past section (2) → predetermined time has elapsed (5 seconds has elapsed) → display of past section (3) → predetermined time has elapsed (5 seconds has elapsed) → display of the current section.

Next, the configuration of the game board 6 of the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained with reference to Figure 3. The game board 6 is made of plywood or a transparent synthetic resin material, and an image display device 26 is removably attached to the back side. The game board 6 is formed with a game area 7 in which game balls can roll, and is formed with an outer rail member 18 and an inner rail member 19 for guiding game balls shot out from the launching device to the game area 7. In addition, the game area 7 is provided with a gate member 20 through which game balls can pass, a first starting port 21 through which game balls can enter, a stage 17 for making it easier for game balls to enter the first starting port 21, a second starting port 22 through which game balls can enter, a normal winning port 23 through which game balls can enter, a first large winning port 24 through which game balls can enter when a big win 1 game or a big win 2 game described below is being played, a second large winning port 32 through which game balls can enter when a small win game described below is being played, an outlet 25 for discharging game balls that do not enter any of the winning ports outside the game area (game ball discharge gutter), a movable body 28 that can move in the vertical direction, and other components such as game nails (not shown) and a windmill. In this embodiment, the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 21, the second start hole 22, the normal prize hole 23, the first large prize hole 24, and the second large prize hole 32 may be referred to as a "win" or "ball entry," and the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 21 or the second start hole 22 may be referred to as a "start entry."

The play area 7 has a play area 7a (a play area for so-called "left-handed play") formed to the left of the center (dotted line C) and a play area 7b (a play area for so-called "right-handed play") formed to the right of the center.

The gate member 20 is provided in the right central part of the play area 7, and allows the game ball to pass through when a so-called "right hit" is performed, in which the game ball is shot to the right side of the play area 7. In addition, it is always open upward, and always allows the game ball to pass through. When a game ball passes through the gate member 20 and is detected by the gate detection SW 20a, the "passing gate detection time processing" described below is performed, and a "normal pattern hit determination processing" is performed to determine whether or not to protrude a protruding member (not shown) provided in the second starting hole 22, and a "normal pattern change game" is executed in which the determination result of the normal pattern hit determination processing is derived after the normal pattern change time has elapsed. The gate member 20 may also be provided in the left central part of the play area 7.

When a normal pattern change game based on passing through gate member 20 is being played, if a game ball also passes through gate member 20, the execution of the normal pattern change game based on that passage is put on hold, and up to a maximum of "4" balls can be put on hold, excluding the normal pattern change game being played. Specifically, a reserved memory area for the normal symbol changing game is provided in the main RAM 103, and the reserved memory area is composed of a "change memory area" corresponding to the currently changing normal symbol changing game, a "first memory area" corresponding to the normal symbol changing game that will be played after the currently changing normal symbol changing game has ended, and then a "second memory area", a "third memory area", and a "fourth memory area". When the currently changing normal symbol changing game ends, the judgment information (random number value) stored in the "first memory area" is transferred to the "change memory area", the judgment information (random number value) stored in the "second memory area" is transferred to the "first memory area", the judgment information (random number value) stored in the "third memory area" is transferred to the "second memory area", the judgment information (random number value) stored in the "fourth memory area" is transferred to the "third memory area", and the "fourth memory area" becomes empty.

The first starting hole 21 is provided in the center of the game area 7, and is capable of receiving game balls when a so-called "left shot" is being performed, in which the game ball is shot to the left side of the game area 7, and is not capable of receiving game balls when a so-called "right shot" is being performed. The first starting hole 21 is always open at the top, and always allows game balls to enter. When a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 and is detected by the first starting hole detection SW 21a, for example, a "3" game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and if any reserved memory area is empty in addition to the prize balls, a "pattern change game" is executed in which a special symbol hit determination process is performed, and the special symbol and decorative symbol (including the fourth symbol) described below are displayed in a variable manner, and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (special symbol and decorative symbol) is derived (determined display) after the variable time has elapsed.

When a pattern change game based on a ball entering the first starting hole 21 is being played, if another game ball enters the first starting hole 21, the execution of the pattern change game based on that ball entry is put on hold, and up to four balls can be put on hold, excluding the pattern change game that is being played.

Specifically, a reserved memory area for the symbol change game is provided in the main RAM 103, and the reserved memory area is composed of a "change memory area" corresponding to the currently changing symbol change game, a "first memory area" corresponding to the symbol change game to be played after the currently changing symbol change game ends, and the "second memory area", "third memory area", and "fourth memory area". Then, when the currently changing symbol change game ends with judgment information (random number value) stored in all reserved memory areas, the judgment information (random number value) stored in the "first memory area" is transferred to the "change memory area", the judgment information (random number value) stored in the "second memory area" is transferred to the "first memory area", the judgment information (random number value) stored in the "third memory area" is transferred to the "second memory area", the judgment information (random number value) stored in the "fourth memory area" is transferred to the "third memory area", and the "fourth memory area" becomes empty. Although the first starting hole 21 is an entrance hole through which the game ball can enter, it may also be configured as a passage area through which the game ball can pass.

A starting hole light emitting device 21a is provided around the first starting hole 21. When a game ball enters the first starting hole 21, the starting hole light emitting device 21a can emit light to notify the player that the ball has entered, or, when a pending ball pre-reading performance is performed (described below), emit light in the same color as the reserved icon (or the variable icon) that is the target of the pending ball pre-reading performance. This allows the player to recognize the color of the hidden reserved icon (or the variable icon) from the light emitted by the starting hole light emitting device 21a, even if the reserved icon (or the variable icon) is temporarily hidden (for example, during a super reach).

The second starting hole 22 is located in the right center of the game area 7, and is capable of accepting game balls when a so-called "right-hand shot" is performed, in which the game ball is shot to the right side of the game area 7, and is not capable of accepting game balls when a so-called "left-hand shot" is performed. Unlike the first starting hole 21, the second starting hole 22 is not always open upward, and does not allow game balls to enter as a general rule (is in a "closed" state). In other words, the second starting hole 22 has a protruding member that can protrude forward, and only when this protruding member protrudes forward (when in an "open" state) is the game ball able to enter.

Regarding whether or not the protruding member is protruded forward to allow the game ball to enter, when a normal symbol hit is determined in the normal symbol hit determination process, the protruding member can be opened and closed in the opening and closing manner shown in "Opening and closing of the second start hole" in FIG. 6. When a game ball enters the second start hole 22 and is detected by the second start hole detection SW 22a, for example, a "2" game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a symbol change game is executed.

When a symbol change game based on a ball entering the second start hole 22 is being played, if another game ball enters the second start hole 22, the execution of the symbol change game based on that ball entry is not put on hold. In other words, in the main RAM 103, the only memory area related to balls entering the second start hole 22 is the "change memory area" that corresponds to the currently changing symbol change game.

Note that, although only the "variable memory area" is provided as the memory area for balls entering the second starting hole 22, it may be configured in the same way as the memory area for balls entering the first starting hole 21 described above. Also, a protruding member that can move in the front-to-back direction is used as the second starting hole 22, but a so-called "electric tulip" with movable wings may also be used. Also, although the second starting hole 22 is an entry hole through which game balls can enter, it may be configured as a passing area through which game balls can pass.

In addition, in this embodiment, the series of steps in which a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 and the second starting hole 22, a special symbol hit determination process is performed, the special symbol and decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner, and the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process (special symbol and decorative symbol) is derived (determined display) after the variation time has elapsed is sometimes referred to as a "symbol change game" or simply as a "one-variation game." Also, the period during which the "symbol change game" is being played is sometimes referred to as a "variation display."

When one game ball enters the first starting hole 21, a "pattern change game" based on the entry of one game ball is executed by the first special pattern display 27a and the image display device 26, and when one game ball enters the second starting hole 22, a "pattern change game" based on the entry of one game ball is executed by the second special pattern display 27b and the image display device 26. Therefore, the "pattern change game" refers to the general term for the game played by the first special pattern display 27a and the image display device 26, and the general term for the game played by the second special pattern display 27b and the image display device 26.

In addition, in this embodiment, deriving the judgment result of the special pattern hit judgment process (special patterns and decorative patterns) after the fluctuation time in the pattern fluctuation game has elapsed is referred to as a "confirmed display" (of the special patterns and decorative patterns). A "confirmed display" is a state in which the special patterns and decorative patterns have completely stopped. On the other hand, in a pattern fluctuation game, temporarily stopping the decorative patterns (excluding the fourth pattern here) before the fluctuation time has elapsed is referred to as a "temporary stop display" of the decorative patterns. Examples of a "temporary stop display" include the decorative patterns on the left and right when in a "reach" state, as described below, and the "swinging fluctuation display" before the "confirmed display". The "swinging variable display" before the "confirmed display" is, for example, a variable display that is performed at a branching point where the decorative pattern is "temporarily stopped" at, for example, "767" and then "confirmedly displayed" as "767", or a missing display of "767" is temporarily "temporarily stopped", a reversal effect is performed to derive "777", and then "777" is "confirmedly displayed". Note that the fourth pattern is "confirmedly displayed" without a "temporary stop display".

There are four regular winning holes 23, three at the lower left and one at the lower right of the game area 7. The three regular winning holes 23 at the lower left are capable of receiving game balls when a left hit is being performed (no balls can be received when a right hit is being performed), and the one regular winning hole 23 at the lower right is capable of receiving game balls when a right hit is being performed (no balls can be received when a left hit is being performed). The regular winning holes 23 are always open upward like the first starting hole 21, and always allow game balls to enter. When a game ball enters the regular winning hole 23 and is detected by the regular winning hole detection SW 23a, for example, eight game balls are paid out as prize balls. The positions of the regular winning holes 23 can be changed as desired, and the number of the regular winning holes 23 may be less than four. Also, the number of winning balls may be different between the "3" regular winning holes 23 on the lower left and the "1" regular winning hole 23 on the lower right.

The first large prize opening 24 is located in the lower right part of the game area 7, and is capable of receiving game balls when a "right hit" is being performed (no game balls can be received when a "left hit" is being performed). The first large prize opening 24 has an opening door, and when a special symbol hit is determined in the special symbol hit determination process, a big win game is executed and the opening door tilts forward to allow the game ball to enter. When a game ball enters the first large prize opening 24 and is detected by the first large prize opening detection SW 24a, for example, "15" game balls are paid out as prize balls.

In one big win game, the door of the first big winning opening 24 opens (tilts forward) for the number of rounds (R) shown in FIG. 6. Then, it opens (tilts forward) for 29.5 S (S = seconds) per round, and if the first big winning opening detection SW 24a detects that 10 game balls have entered before 29.5 S has elapsed, the door closes and the game proceeds to the next round even before 29.5 S has elapsed, and this is repeated for the specified number of rounds. On the other hand, if 29.5 S has elapsed before the first big winning opening detection SW 24a detects that 10 game balls have entered (so-called "attacker full open"), the door closes and the game proceeds to the next round. In this case, the player is at a disadvantage because one round of play ends before the specified number of balls per round, which is 10 balls, is reached.

In this embodiment, a door that tilts forward is used as the first large prize opening 24, but a so-called "electric tulip" may also be used, or a "shutter member" that moves back and forth may also be used.

The second large winning hole 32 is provided in the lower right part of the game area 7, and the game ball can enter when "right hand" is being performed (it cannot enter when "left hand" is being performed). In addition, a specific area (so-called "V winning hole") into which the game ball can enter is provided inside the second large winning hole 32. When the game ball enters the specific area, the big win 2 game is executed. That is, when a small win is determined in the special pattern hit determination process, the small win game is executed, and the opening and closing door tilts forward to allow the game ball to enter. Furthermore, the cover member of the specific area is opened to allow the game ball to enter the specific area. When the small win game is being executed (for example, the first round), if the game ball enters the specific area, the small win game ends and the big win 2 game is executed. In other words, in the jackpot 2 game, the door of the first large prize opening 24 opens (tilts forward) for the number of awarded rounds shown in FIG. 6, but since the first round is a small prize game, the second large prize opening 32 opens, and the first large prize opening 24 opens from the second round onwards.

In addition, a lid member (not shown) is provided in the specific area, and the lid member is in an open state when a small win game is being played. In this embodiment, special patterns F and G are provided as special patterns that will play a small win game. In addition, in these special patterns, the lid member is in an open state, allowing the game ball to enter the specific area. In other words, in a small win game, as long as you "hit to the right" as instructed, it is possible to have the game ball enter the specific area, and it is possible to play a big win 2 game.

The image display device 26 has a display area covering almost the entire area, is provided so as to be located above the stage 17, and is capable of displaying a symbol-changing game and performance images in the display area. In other words, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 or the second starting hole 22 and a special symbol hit determination process is performed, the left decorative symbol 26a, the middle decorative symbol 26b, and the right decorative symbol 26c are changed (vertical scroll) in the variable display area. Note that, regardless of whether a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 or the second starting hole 22, the left decorative symbol 26a, the middle decorative symbol 26b, and the right decorative symbol 26c are changed (vertical scroll) in the variable display area (the special symbol display device is different, but the decorative symbols used in the image display device 26 are the same).

Then, within the change time, a performance image is displayed, and when the change time has elapsed, if there is a special win (or small win), for example, a "7" is stopped on each decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern combination of "777" is displayed as a confirmed result, thereby announcing that there is a special win (or small win). On the other hand, if there is a special miss, for example, a decorative pattern combination of "765" is displayed as a confirmed result, thereby announcing that there is a special miss.

In addition to each decorative pattern, a fourth pattern 26d (the fourth pattern following the above-mentioned left decorative pattern 26a, center decorative pattern 26b, and right decorative pattern 26c) can be displayed in the lower right of the display area, and variable display and fixed display are possible in synchronization with each decorative pattern. The image display device 26 can also display a first start port reserved number image 26e that displays the number of reserved balls in the pattern change game in the first start port 21 with "0" to "4," and a first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g, a first start port second reserved ball image display area 26h, a first start port third reserved ball image display area 26i, and a first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j (simply indicated as "g," "h," "i," and "j" in FIG. 3) that display the number of reserved balls in the pattern change game in the first start port 21 with reserved ball images. It is also possible to display the variable icon display area 26o (shown simply as "o" in FIG. 3) which displays an icon image corresponding to the currently executed symbol variable game.

The number of reserved balls displayed in the first start port reserved ball number image 26e is synchronized with the number of reserved balls displayed in the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j. For example, if "4" is displayed in the first start port reserved ball number image 26e, "4" reserved ball images will be displayed in the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j.

The number of reserved balls displayed as the first start port reserved ball number image 26e may be referred to as "reserved number" below. Also, the reserved ball images displayed in the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g, the first start port second reserved ball image display area 26h, the first start port third reserved ball image display area 26i, and the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j may be referred to as "reserved icons" below. Also, the icon image displayed in the variable icon display area 26o may be referred to as "the variable icon" below. Also, the variable icon and reserved icon may be collectively referred to simply as "icon".

The variable icon display area 26o, the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g, the first start port second reserved ball image display area 26h, the first start port third reserved ball image display area 26i, and the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j are displayed on the image display device 26, but are not limited to this and may be displayed on an LED or lamp, or may be displayed on a display device other than the image display device 26 (for example, a second image display device, a so-called "sub-LCD").

The left decorative pattern 26a, the middle decorative pattern 26b, the right decorative pattern 26c, and the fourth pattern 26d can display pattern images from "1" to "8", and when the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a special hit, any one of the pattern combinations "111", "222", "333", "444", "555", "666", "777", and "888" can be displayed according to the special pattern. Also, when the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a small hit, any one of the pattern combinations "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", and "888" can be displayed. There may also be a pattern combination (for example, "999") that is exclusive to small hits.

On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a special symbol miss, it is possible to display a symbol combination other than the above symbol combinations. If it is a miss, when a special symbol change pattern accompanied by a "reach" is determined in the special symbol change pattern described below, a symbol combination such as "767" is confirmed and displayed, and when a special symbol change pattern without a "reach" is determined, a symbol combination such as "765" is confirmed and displayed.

The combination of symbols displayed as the left decorative pattern 26a, the middle decorative pattern 26b, and the right decorative pattern 26c is the same as the combination of symbols displayed as the fourth pattern 26d. For example, if "777" is displayed as the left decorative pattern 26a, the middle decorative pattern 26b, and the right decorative pattern 26c, the fourth pattern 26d also displays "777", and if "767" is displayed as the left decorative pattern 26a, the middle decorative pattern 26b, and the right decorative pattern 26c, the fourth pattern 26d also displays "767".

"Reach" refers to a state in which the left decorative pattern 26a and the right decorative pattern 26c display the same number (temporary stop display) and the middle decorative pattern 26b is displaying a variable number (the temporary stop display and the variable display are not limited to this). In this embodiment, if the result of the "special pattern hit determination process" is a special pattern hit, the process is configured to always go through "Reach", so it can be said that this is a state in which the player can expect a winning game.

The fourth pattern 26d may not be a combination of the above patterns, but may simply display a single digit number, a two digit number, or a symbol or character. The difference in the color of the light emitted may indicate a special win, a special miss, a small win, or the type of pattern.

The symbol display device 27 is provided outside the game area (outside the outer rail member 18), which is an area of the game board 6 that is different from the game area 7. The symbol display device 27 is provided with a first special symbol display 27a that is display-controlled by the main control board 100 and executes a symbol change game based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 21, and a second special symbol display 27b that executes a symbol change game based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 22. The first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b are configured with 7-segment displays, and in the symbol change game, the special symbol is made to flash "-" (horizontal bar pattern) from the start of the change, and when it is time to derive the judgment result of the special symbol hit judgment process, if it is a miss, the "-" (horizontal bar pattern) is lit (confirmed display), and if it is a special symbol hit, for example, "7" is lit (confirmed display). In other words, the "special pattern" refers to a pattern whose display is controlled by the main control board 100.

In this embodiment, the "special pattern" and the above-mentioned left decorative pattern 26a, middle decorative pattern 26b, right decorative pattern 26c, and fourth pattern 26d may be simply referred to as "patterns" or "identification information." Furthermore, the left decorative pattern 26a, middle decorative pattern 26b, and right decorative pattern 26c managed by the performance control board 200 may be simply referred to as "decorative patterns." Furthermore, the left decorative pattern 26a, middle decorative pattern 26b, right decorative pattern 26c, and fourth pattern 26d managed by the performance control board 200 may be collectively referred to as "sub-patterns."

The symbol display device 27 is provided with a first special symbol reserved indicator 27c, which is display controlled by the main control board 100 and displays the number of reserved symbols for the symbol change game based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 21.

The first special symbol reserved indicator 27c is made up of two dot LED indicators, and can display the number of reserved balls by turning them off, on, or blinking. For example, when the number of reserved balls is "0", both dot LED indicators are "off", when the number of reserved balls is "1", one is "on" and the other is "off", when the number of reserved balls is "2", both are "on", when the number of reserved balls is "3", one is "on" and the other is "blinking", and when the number of reserved balls is "4", both are "blinking".

The first special pattern reserved indicator 27c is, in principle, synchronized with the number of reserved balls displayed as the first start port reserved ball number image 26e described above and the number of reserved balls displayed in the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j (except when a command error occurs). For example, when both first special pattern reserved indicators 27c are "blinking" (when there are four reserved balls), "4" is displayed as the first start port reserved ball number image 26e, and "4" reserved ball images are displayed in the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j. In the following, the first special pattern reserved indicator 27c may be referred to as the "main reserved ball indicator".

The first special symbol reserved indicator 27c is configured with two dot LED indicators, but is not limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device whose display is controlled by the main control board 100 may be provided, and the indicator may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

The symbol display device 27 is also provided with a normal symbol display 27e, which is display controlled by the main control board 100 and executes a normal symbol variation game based on the passage of a game ball through the gate member 20. The normal symbol display 27e is composed of two dot LED displays, and in the normal symbol variation game, from the start of the variation, it repeatedly switches one on and the other off, and switches one off and the other on, and when it is time to derive the result of the normal symbol hit determination process, if the normal symbol is a miss, it displays a confirmation by turning one on and turning the other off, and if the normal symbol is a hit, it displays a confirmation by turning one off and turning the other on.

The symbol display device 27 is also provided with a normal symbol reserved indicator 27f, which is display controlled by the main control board 100 and displays the number of reserved symbols for the normal symbol variation game based on the passage of the game ball through the gate member 20. Note that the normal symbol reserved indicator 27f is composed of two dot LED indicators, similar to the first special symbol reserved indicator 27c, and the display format of the reserved number is also the same, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

The symbol display device 27 is also provided with a round indicator 27g which is display controlled by the main control board 100 and displays the "number of rounds (see FIG. 6)". The round indicator 27g is composed of two dot LED indicators, one for 4 rounds and one for 10 rounds. For example, if a special symbol A wins, the LED indicator for 4 rounds lights up and the others go off, and if a special symbol D wins, the LED indicator for 10 rounds lights up and the others go off.

The game board 6 is provided with a plurality of board lighting devices 29 (e.g., full-color LEDs), which, when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, emit light in a predetermined light pattern, enhancing the decorativeness of the pachinko game machine 1. For example, as shown by reference numeral 29 in FIG. 3, the board lighting devices 29 can decorate the entire game area 7 of the game board 6. In addition, all of the board lighting devices 29 can be turned off to highlight the display contents of the image display device 26. The predetermined light emission pattern is composed of a plurality of light emission patterns that specify the light emission speed, light emission color, and which LEDs are to be emitted and which are not to be emitted, etc.

On the right side of the image display device 26, a first special symbol sub-reserved indicator 29a and a right-hit indicator 29c are provided as an embodiment of the board lighting device 29. The first special symbol sub-reserved indicator 29a is display-controlled by the performance control board 200 and is composed of two dot LED indicators, and can display the number of reserved balls by turning them off, on, or off. For example, when the number of reserved balls is "0", both dot LED indicators are "off", when the number of reserved balls is "1", one is "on" and the other is "off", when the number of reserved balls is "2", both are "on", when the number of reserved balls is "3", one is "on" and the other is "blinking", and when the number of reserved balls is "4", both are "blinking".

The first special pattern sub-reserve indicator 29a is synchronized in principle with the number of reserved balls displayed as the first start port reserved ball number image 26e and the number of reserved balls displayed in the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j (except when a command error occurs). For example, when both first special pattern sub-reserve indicators 29a are "blinking" (when there are four reserved balls), "4" is displayed as the first start port reserved ball number image 26e, and "4" reserved ball images are displayed in the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j. In the following, the first special pattern sub-reserve indicator 29a may be referred to as the "sub-reserve indicator".

Note that the first special symbol sub-reserved display 29a is configured with two dot LED displays, but is not limited to this. For example, it may be displayed on a display device other than the image display device 26 (e.g., a second image display device, a so-called "sub-LCD").

The right-hit indicator 29c is display-controlled by the performance control board 200, and for example, lights up based on receiving an opening command during a big hit or small hit game, or lights up based on receiving a game state designation command (time reduction). This can encourage the player to hit to the right. On the other hand, it is turned off during normal game play (turned off based on receiving a game state designation command (normal)), which can encourage the player to hit to the left. Note that the right-hit indicator 29c is turned off to encourage the player to hit to the left, but a left-hit indicator may be provided and the left-hit indicator may be turned on to encourage the player to hit to the left.

Next, the internal configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (block diagram of the control system) will be explained based on FIG. 4. Note that the explanation of the configuration of the gaming board 6 in FIG. 3 will be omitted as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main control board 100, a performance control board 200, a payout control board 300, and a power supply board 400 on the rear side of the middle frame 3. The main control board 100 and the performance control board 200 are connected via a harness or the like (not shown) so that only one-way communication is possible from the main control board 100 to the performance control board 200. The main control board 100 and the payout control board 300 are connected via a harness or the like so that two-way communication is possible. The payout control board 300 is connected to the performance control board 200 so that only one-way communication is possible from the payout control board 300 to the performance control board 200. The power supply board 400 is connected so that it can receive external power via a power plug (not shown) and supply the supplied external power to any of the main control board 100, the performance control board 200, and the payout control board 300.

The main control board 100 is connected via harnesses, relay boards, etc. to allow input from various switches, and is also connected via harnesses, relay boards, etc. to allow display control for various displays and drive control for various solenoids. The performance control board 200 is connected via harnesses, relay boards, etc. to allow input from various switches, and is also connected via harnesses, relay boards, etc. to allow display control for various displays.

The main control board 100 is equipped with a main CPU 101 that executes control processing related to the progress of the game, a main ROM 102 that stores the control programs necessary for the control processing related to the progress of the game, and a main RAM 103 that can read and write necessary for the control processing related to the progress of the game. In addition to these, although not shown in the figure, it also has an interrupt controller circuit that issues an interrupt signal to the main CPU 101, a hardware random number generation circuit that generates random numbers within a certain range, and the like. The control processing related to the progress of the game in the main CPU 101 will be described in detail later using a flowchart.

Main RAM 103 is provided with storage areas (not shown) for managing various information. For example, there are a set value storage area for storing set value information, a special symbol status flag storage area for storing the status of special symbols, a game status storage area for storing the game status, a big hit status storage area for storing the status in a big hit game, a small hit status storage area for storing the status in a small hit game, a normal symbol status flag storage area for storing the status of normal symbols, and a normal symbol win status storage area for storing the status in a normal symbol win game.

The main RAM 103 is provided with counters (not shown) for managing various information (time and number of times). For example, there are a time-saving number counter for counting (measuring and storing) the number of times that the symbol variation game has been played in the time-saving play state, a time management counter for managing various times (e.g., opening time, etc.), and a round number counter for managing the number of rounds in the jackpot 1 play and the jackpot 2 play.

The gate detection SW 20a is provided inside the passage opening of the gate member 20 of the game board 6, and is a SW for detecting that the game ball has passed through the gate member 20. In other words, the gate detection SW 20a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and when the passage of the game ball is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. Then, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) that inputs the detected information controls to immediately execute the normal pattern change game when the normal pattern reserve display 27f is not executing the normal pattern change game and when the judgment information (random number value) is not stored in any of the corresponding change memory area for normal patterns to the fourth memory area, for example, controls to reserve the execution of the normal pattern change game when the judgment information (random number value) is stored up to the third memory area, and controls not to reserve the execution of the normal pattern change game when the judgment information (random number value) is stored up to the fourth memory area.

The first start hole detection SW21a is provided inside the winning hole of the first start hole 21 of the game board 6, and is a switch for detecting that a game ball has entered the first start hole 21. In other words, the first start hole detection SW21a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and when a game ball has entered, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. The main control board 100 (main CPU 101), which has input the detected information, then executes a process to have the payout control board 300 pay out three game balls as prize balls for the game ball having entered the first start hole 21.

In addition, when an input is made from the first start hole detection SW21a, if the pattern change game is not being executed on either the first special pattern display 27a or the second special pattern display 27b, and if no judgment information (random number value) is stored in any of the variable memory areas for the special pattern (first start hole) through the fourth memory area, the main control board 100 immediately controls to execute the pattern change game on the first special pattern display 27a, and if judgment information (random number value) is stored up to the third memory area, for example, the main control board 100 controls to suspend the execution of the pattern change game, and if judgment information (random number value) is stored up to the fourth memory area, the main control board 100 controls not to suspend the execution of the pattern change game.

The second start hole detection SW22a is provided inside the winning hole of the second start hole 22, and is a SW for detecting that a game ball has entered the second start hole 22. In other words, the second start hole detection SW22a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and when a game ball has entered, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. The main control board 100 (main CPU 101), which has input the detected information, then executes a process to have the payout control board 300 pay out two game balls as prize balls for the game ball having entered the second start hole 22.

In addition, when an input is made from the second start hole detection SW22a, if the pattern change game is not being executed on either the first special pattern display device 27a or the second special pattern display device 27b, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) immediately controls the second special pattern display device 27b to execute the pattern change game.

The second starting port opening/closing solenoid 22b is provided behind the second starting port 22, and is a solenoid for opening and closing the protruding member provided in the above-mentioned second starting port 22. In other words, the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 22b and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) drives and controls the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 22b to open and close in the opening/closing manner shown in "Opening and closing the second starting port" in Figure 6 when a normal pattern hit is determined in the normal pattern hit determination process.

The normal winning hole detection SW23a is provided inside the winning hole of the normal winning hole 23 of the game board 6, and is a switch for detecting that a game ball has entered the normal winning hole 23. In other words, the normal winning hole detection SW23a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and when a game ball has entered, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. The main control board 100 (main CPU 101), which has input the detected information, then executes a process to have the payout control board 300 pay out eight game balls as prize balls for the game ball having entered the normal winning hole 23.

The first large prize opening detection SW 24a is provided inside the winning opening of the first large prize opening 24, and is a SW for detecting that a game ball has entered the first large prize opening 24. In other words, the first large prize opening detection SW 24a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and when a game ball is detected to have entered, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. Then, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) that inputs the detected information executes a process to have the payout control board 300 pay out 15 game balls as prize balls due to the game ball having entered the first large prize opening 24. In addition, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) transmits a large prize opening entry designation command indicating that a game ball has entered the first large prize opening 24 to the performance control board 200. This allows the performance control board 200 to recognize the status of the game ball entering the first large prize opening 24.

The first large prize opening opening solenoid 24b is provided behind or to the side of the first large prize opening 24, and is a solenoid for opening and closing the opening door provided in the first large prize opening 24. In other words, the first large prize opening opening solenoid 24b and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness or relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) drives and controls the first large prize opening opening solenoid 24b to open and close the opening door for the number of rounds shown in FIG. 6 during one big win game.

The second large prize opening detection SW 32a is provided inside the prize opening of the second large prize opening 32, and is a SW for detecting that a game ball has entered the second large prize opening 32. In other words, the second large prize opening detection SW 32a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and when a game ball has entered, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. Then, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) that inputs the detected information performs processing to have the payout control board 300 pay out "15" game balls as prize balls due to the game ball having entered the second large prize opening 32. In addition, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) transmits a large prize opening entry designation command indicating that a game ball has entered the second large prize opening 32 to the performance control board 200. This allows the performance control board 200 to recognize the status of the game ball entering the second large winning hole 32.

The second large prize opening opening solenoid 32b is provided behind the second large prize opening 32, and is a solenoid for opening and closing the door provided at the second large prize opening 32. In other words, the second large prize opening opening solenoid 32b and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness or relay board, and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) drives and controls the second large prize opening opening solenoid 32b when a small win is determined in the special symbol win determination process.

The specific area detection SW32c is provided in a specific area inside the winning port of the second large winning port 32, and is a SW for detecting that a game ball has entered the specific area of the second large winning port 32. In other words, the specific area detection SW32c and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and when a game ball has entered, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. Then, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) that inputs the detected information performs processing to have the payout control board 300 pay out "15" game balls as prize balls due to the game ball having entered the specific area. Furthermore, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) that inputs the detected information performs processing to end the small win game and transition to the big win 2 game. In addition, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) transmits a specific area winning designation command to the performance control board 200, indicating that the game ball has entered the specific area of the second large winning opening 32. This allows the performance control board 200 to recognize the ball entry status of the game ball into the specific area of the second large winning opening 32.

The specific area opening/closing solenoid 32d is provided behind the specific area, and is a solenoid for opening and closing the lid member provided in the specific area. In other words, the specific area opening/closing solenoid 32d and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) drives and controls the specific area opening/closing solenoid 32d to open and close the lid member when a small win is determined in the special pattern hit determination process. The opening and closing times of the lid member can be set to any time.

The out detection SW25a is provided downstream of the flow path that collects the game balls that have entered the first start port 21 and been detected by the first start port detection SW21a, the game balls that have entered the second start port 22 and been detected by the second start port detection SW22a, the game balls that have entered the normal prize port 23 and been detected by the normal prize port detection SW23a, the game balls that have entered the first large prize port 24 and been detected by the first large prize port detection SW24a, the game balls that have entered the second large prize port 32 and been detected by the second large prize port detection SW32a, and the game balls that have entered the out port 25.

The out detection SW 25a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and when an incoming game ball is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. This allows the main control board 100 to know the number of out balls. It is also possible to provide an out detection SW at the out port 25 and count the game balls detected by the out detection SW as the number of out balls.

The first special symbol display 27a is provided in the symbol display device 27, and is a display controlled by the main control board 100 to execute a symbol change game based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 21. In other words, the first special symbol display 27a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) controls the display of the symbol change game on the first special symbol display 27a when the execution conditions for the symbol change game on the first special symbol display 27a are met. Note that the execution conditions for the symbol change game on the first special symbol display 27a are met when a positive judgment is made in the processing of step S105-2-2 in the "special symbol change start processing" (see FIG. 19) described below.

The second special symbol display 27b is provided in the symbol display device 27, and is display-controlled by the main control board 100, and is a display for executing a symbol change game based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 22. In other words, the second special symbol display 27b and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) controls the display of the symbol change game on the second special symbol display 27b when the execution conditions for the symbol change game on the second special symbol display 27b are met. Note that the execution conditions for the symbol change game on the second special symbol display 27b are met when a positive judgment is made in the processing of step S105-2-1 in the "special symbol change start processing" (see FIG. 19).

The first special symbol reserved indicator 27c is provided in the symbol display device 27, and is a display controlled by the main control board 100 to display the number of reserved symbols in the symbol change game based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 21. In other words, the first special symbol reserved indicator 27c and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and when the main control board 100 inputs information that a game ball has been detected from the first starting hole detection SW21a, it controls the display of the first special symbol reserved indicator 27c (from off to on, or from on to blinking) if the upper limit of reserved symbols (4) has not been reached. On the other hand, when the symbol change game based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 21 that is currently changing ends, it controls the display of the first special symbol reserved indicator 27c (from blinking to on, or from on to off).

The normal symbol display 27e is provided in the symbol display device 27, and is a display for executing a normal symbol variation game whose display is controlled by the main control board 100. In other words, the normal symbol display 27e and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) controls the display of the normal symbol variation game on the normal symbol display 27e when the execution conditions for the normal symbol variation game on the normal symbol display 27e are met.

The normal symbol reserved indicator 27f is provided in the symbol display device 27, and is a display controlled by the main control board 100 to display the number of reserved normal symbol variation games based on the passage of game balls through the gate member 20. In other words, the normal symbol reserved indicator 27f and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and when the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) inputs information that game balls have been detected from the gate detection SW 20a, it controls the display of the normal symbol reserved indicator 27f (from off to on, or from on to blinking) if the upper limit of reserved balls (4 balls) has not been reached. On the other hand, when the currently varying normal symbol variation game ends, it controls the display of the normal symbol reserved indicator 27f (from blinking to on, or from on to off).

The round indicator 27g is provided in the symbol display device 27, and is a display controlled by the main control board 100 to display the number of rounds. In other words, the round indicator 27g and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and, for example, when a symbol change game determined to be a special symbol win in the special symbol win determination process ends and a special symbol (e.g., "7") indicating a win is displayed on the first special symbol display 27a, the LED indicator for the corresponding number of rounds is controlled to light up. When a jackpot 1 game or a jackpot 2 game is being played, the round indicator 27g is controlled to light up continuously, and when the jackpot 1 game or the jackpot 2 game ends, the round indicator 27g is controlled to light off.

The magnetic sensors 27h are provided at multiple locations on the game board 6, and are sensors for detecting magnetism. In other words, the magnetic sensors 27h and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and, for example, when an abnormal magnetism exceeding a predetermined value is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. This allows the main control board 100 to detect abnormal magnetism. Then, when an abnormal magnetism is detected, information that the abnormal magnetism has been detected (magnetic abnormality error designation command) is sent to the performance control board 200. This allows an announcement to be made that an abnormal magnetism has been detected.

The radio wave sensors 27i are provided at multiple locations on the game board 6, and are sensors for detecting radio waves. In other words, the radio wave sensors 27i and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and, for example, when abnormal radio waves exceeding a predetermined specified value are detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. This allows the main control board 100 to detect abnormal radio waves. Then, when abnormal radio waves are detected, information indicating that the abnormal radio waves have been detected (error designation command for radio wave abnormality) is transmitted to the performance control board 200. This allows an announcement to be made that abnormal radio waves have been detected.

The performance control board 200 is provided with a performance control unit 200a, which has a sub-CPU 201 that executes the performance control process, a sub-ROM 202 that stores the control program required for the performance control process, and a sub-RAM 203 that can read and write data required for the performance control process. In addition, an image/sound control unit 200b is provided that is connected to the performance control unit 200a via a harness or the like so as to enable two-way communication, and the image/sound control unit 200b has an image/sound CPU 204 that executes the image/sound control process, a sound ROM 205 that stores sound data, a CG ROM 206 that stores image data, and a VRAM 207 equipped with a frame buffer that stores image generation data, etc. In addition, a light emission drive control unit 200c is provided that is connected to the performance control unit 200a via a harness or the like so as to enable two-way communication. The light emission drive control unit 200c has a light emission drive CPU 208 that executes light emission control processing and drive control processing, a light emission drive ROM 209 that stores the control programs required for the light emission control processing and drive control processing, and a light emission drive RAM 210 that can read and write the data required for the light emission control processing and drive control processing.

The performance control unit 200a is also connected so that operation information from the performance button detection SW14a, the performance lever detection SW15a, and the cross key detection SW16a can be input.

The effect button detection SW14a is provided on the effect button 14, and is a switch for detecting that the effect button 14 is pressed by the player when the effect button 14 is in the operation valid time. In other words, the effect button detection SW14a and the effect control board 200 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and information indicating that the effect button 14 has been pressed is input to the effect control board 200. The effect control board 200, which has input the information indicating that the effect button 14 has been pressed, controls the effect corresponding to the pressing of the effect button 14 via the image display device 26 and the speaker 10. Here, for example, in a symbol change game, the effect button 14 is set to an operation valid time (also called an operation valid period) for a predetermined period of time, and the effect button detection SW14a only detects pressing when the operation valid time is set.

The effect lever detection SW15a is provided on the effect lever 15, and is a SW for detecting that the effect lever 15 has been operated by the player when the effect lever 15 is in the effective operation time. In other words, the effect lever detection SW15a and the effect control board 200 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and information indicating that the effect lever 15 has been operated is input to the effect control board 200. The effect control board 200, which has input the information indicating that the effect lever 15 has been operated, controls the effect according to the operation of the effect lever 15 via the image display device 26 and speaker 10. Here, for example, in a symbol change game, the effect lever 15 has a valid operation time set for a predetermined period of time, and the effect lever detection SW15a detects only the operation when the valid operation time is set.

The cross key detection SW 16a is provided on the cross key button 16, and is a switch for detecting when the cross key button 16 is pressed by the player. In other words, the cross key detection SW 16a and the performance control board 200 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and information indicating that the cross key button 16 has been operated is input to the performance control board 200.

As described above, by operating the cross key button 16, the amount of light emitted from the light-emitting device 9, the amount of light emitted from the image display device 26, and the volume emitted from the speaker 10 can be adjusted. Specifically, pressing the up button on the cross key button 16 can increase the amount of light (in stages), pressing the down button on the cross key button 16 can decrease the amount of light (in stages), pressing the right button on the cross key button 16 can increase the volume (in stages), and pressing the left button on the cross key button 16 can decrease the volume (in stages).

The light intensity may be set in three stages, "strong", "medium" and "weak", or may be further subdivided into five stages. The volume may be set in three stages, "high", "medium" and "low", or may be further subdivided into five stages. The image display device 26 may display a level gauge image showing the degree of adjustment of the light intensity or volume, and the speaker 10 may emit an adjustment sound according to the stage. For example, when the degree of volume adjustment is configured in five stages, the adjustment sound corresponding to the minimum volume value level 1 may be "Do♪", the adjustment sound corresponding to the volume value level 2 may be "Re♪", the adjustment sound corresponding to the volume value level 3 may be "Mi♪", the adjustment sound corresponding to the volume value level 4 may be "Fa♪", and the adjustment sound corresponding to the maximum volume value level 5 may be "So♪". The adjustment sound may be output at a volume value according to the volume value level. For example, "Re♪" may be output at a larger volume value than "Do♪".

The level gauge image may be displayed in a manner that corresponds to the level of light or volume, or in a constant manner regardless of the level of light or volume. Specifically, a display manner that corresponds to the level of light or volume means, for example, displaying the size (display area) of a level gauge image indicating volume level 2, which has a higher volume value than volume level 1, larger than the size (display area) of a level gauge image indicating volume level 1. On the other hand, a constant display manner regardless of the level of light or volume means displaying the size (display area) of the level gauge image to be the same whether it is volume level 1 or volume level 2.

The adjustment sound corresponding to the volume level may be set to, for example, a "beep" sound at any level, with the volume value being different for each level. Specifically, it is envisioned that when the volume level is 1, a "beep" sound is emitted at a volume value corresponding to volume level 1, and when the volume level is 2, a "beep" sound is emitted at a volume value corresponding to volume level 2 (a volume value higher than volume level 1).

In this embodiment, the light intensity and sound volume adjustments can be performed when the pattern change game is not being played, but they may also be performed when the pattern change game is being played. In this case, it is preferable to adjust the above-mentioned level gauge image without displaying it and without emitting the adjustment sound, or to display it in a small size and output the adjustment sound at a low volume. This prevents the level gauge image and adjustment sound corresponding to the pattern change game from being obstructed by the level gauge image and adjustment sound.

It may also be possible to adjust the light intensity and the sound volume during the execution of the jackpot 1 game, the jackpot 2 game, and the small jackpot game. In this case, the display control of the level gauge image and the output control of the adjustment sound may be performed in the same manner as when the light intensity and the sound volume are adjusted when the pattern change game is not being played, or the display control of the level gauge image and the output control of the adjustment sound may be performed in the same manner as when the light intensity and the sound volume are adjusted when the pattern change game is being played.

Although the above-mentioned level gauge image is displayed on the image display device 26, if a display device is provided in addition to the image display device 26, it may be displayed on the other display device. This prevents the display content displayed on the image display device 26 from being obstructed by the display of the level gauge image. When the light amount is adjusted, the level gauge image may be displayed, but the adjustment sound may not be output.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if the cross key button 16 is operated during the effective operation time of the "dialogue preview", "cut-in preview", or "super reach judgement" described below, the corresponding effect will not be executed. For example, even if the cross key button 16 is operated during the effective operation time of the "dialogue preview", the "dialogue preview" will not be executed. In other words, the cross key button 16 is a device used exclusively for volume adjustment, light adjustment, menu operation, mode selection, etc.

An image display device 26 is connected to the image/sound control unit 200b, and image information generated by the image/sound control unit 200b can be displayed. In addition, a speaker 10 is connected to the image/sound control unit 200b, and sound information generated by the image/sound control unit 200b can be output.

The speaker 10 is capable of outputting music (BGM), voice, and sound effects. For example, if information indicating the closed state is not input from the frame open detection SW3a described below, it outputs an alarm sound indicating that the inner frame 3 is in the open state. In other words, the speaker 10 and the image/sound control unit 200b are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and the above-mentioned sounds are output from the speaker 10 under the control of the image/sound control unit 200b.

The light-emitting device 9, the starting port light-emitting device 21a, and the board lighting device 29 are connected to the light-emitting drive control unit 200c, and light emission can be controlled by the light-emitting drive control unit 200c. The light-emitting drive control unit 200c is also connected to the board drive device 30, and the movable body 28 can be driven and controlled via the board drive device 30.

The movable body 28 is provided on the game board 6 and is capable of performing actions such as "dropping," "swinging," and "rotating." Performing these actions indicates the possibility of receiving a winning game.

Furthermore, when the movable body 28 receives a power-related subcommand, it performs an initial operation in front of the display area of the image display device 26 to check whether the above-mentioned operations such as "drop," "swing," and "rotation" are performed normally. This initial operation involves the movable body 28 moving to the front of the display area of the image display device 26, so the display content displayed in the display area becomes difficult to see for a certain period of time due to the movable body 28. Note that even if the display content displayed in the display area becomes difficult to see due to the initial operation, other components (e.g., the starting port light-emitting device 21a, the first special pattern reserved display 27c, the board lighting device 29, etc.) do not become difficult to see due to the initial operation of the movable body 28.

In addition to these, although not shown in the figure, it also includes an interrupt controller circuit that issues an interrupt signal to the sub-CPU 201, a hardware random number generation circuit that generates random numbers within a certain range, etc.

The payout control board 300 is equipped with a payout CPU 301 that executes the payout control process, a payout ROM 302 that stores the control program required for the payout control process, and a payout RAM 303 that can read and write the data required for the payout control process. In addition, a payout device 304 is connected to the payout control board 300 via a harness or the like, and game balls are paid out into the upper tray 5a by controlling the payout device 304.

Specifically, when the main control board 100 receives information that game balls have been detected by the first start hole detection SW21a, the main control board 100 sends a payout command signal to the payout control board 300 to pay out three prize balls, and the payout control board 300 receives this signal and controls the payout device 304 to pay out three prize balls into the upper tray 5a. When the payout of the three prize balls is complete, the payout control board 300 sends a payout completion signal to the main control board 100, completing the payout of the game balls in response to the input of information that game balls have been detected by the first start hole detection SW21a.

The payout control board 300 is also connected to the launch handle 8 via a harness or the like, and when the player touches the above-mentioned handle touch sensor provided on the launch handle 8, information that the launch handle 8 is being held is input, and the amount of rotation of the launch handle 8 is input based on the amount of launch volume (not shown) provided on the launch handle 8.

The payout control board 300 is also connected to a launching device 305 via a harness or the like, and by controlling the launching device 305, game balls are launched into the game area 7. Specifically, when the player holds the launching handle 8 and inputs the amount of rotation of the launching handle 8, the payout control board 300 controls the launching device 305 with a launch strength according to the amount of rotation of the launching handle 8 to launch the game balls.

The payout control board 300 is also connected to receive an input signal from the ball lending button 12 shown in FIG. 1 via a ball lending unit or the like, and when the ball lending button 12 is operated by a player, the payout control board 300 controls the payout device 304 to pay out a number of game balls (e.g., 125 balls) corresponding to one operation of the ball lending button 12 into the upper tray 5a.

The frame open detection SW3a is provided in the middle frame 3, and can detect the "open" state when the glass frame 4 is open, when the glass frame 4 and the middle frame 3 are open, when the middle frame 3 is open, etc., and can detect the "closed" state when the glass frame 4 and the middle frame 3 are closed. In other words, the frame open detection SW3a and the payout control board 300 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and when in the above-mentioned "closed" state, the information of the closed state is input to the payout control board 300. On the other hand, when in the above-mentioned "open" state, the information of the closed state is not input to the payout control board 300, and the payout control board 300 (payout CPU 301) can detect the above-mentioned "open" state by not being input. In addition, the payout control board 300 (payout CPU 301) can transmit information detected as being in the "closed" state and information detected as being in the "open" state (error designation command for frame opening) to the performance control board 200.

Between the upper tray 5a and the lower tray 5b, a passage is formed to guide the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 5a to the lower tray 5b, and a full tank detection SW 300a is provided in the passage. If the game balls guided to the lower tray 5b are stored without being discharged (outside the gaming machine), the game balls will stop in the passage, and when a certain amount of game balls are stopped, the full tank detection SW 300a turns ON. This makes it possible to detect that the lower tray 5b is also full of game balls. When the full tank detection SW 300a turns ON, the payout CPU 301 stops the payout device 304 from paying out game balls, and transmits information that the full tank detection SW 300a is ON to the performance control board 200. This makes it possible for the performance control board 200 to execute a notification that prompts the game balls stored in the lower tray 5b to be discharged.

The main control board 100, the performance control board 200, and the payout control board 300 are connected to the power supply board 400 via harnesses or the like, and the power supply board 400 receives external power via a power plug (not shown) and supplies the external power to the main control board 100, the performance control board 200, and the payout control board 300. Although not shown, the power supply board 400 is provided with a conversion circuit that converts external power (100 volts AC) to 24 volts DC.

Next, the special symbol hit determination table and the normal symbol hit determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 5. The special symbol hit determination table (for the first start hole) in FIG. 5 (A-1) and the special symbol hit determination table (for the second start hole) in FIG. 5 (A-2) are stored in the main ROM 102. Here, in this embodiment, six levels of setting values can be set, and FIG. 5 (A-1) and (A-2) show an example of a special symbol hit determination table for a setting value of 1, and other setting values are omitted. For example, when the setting value is set to 1, the main CPU 101 performs the special symbol hit determination process by referring to the special symbol hit determination table for the setting value of 1, and when the setting value is set to 6, the main CPU 101 performs the special symbol hit determination process by referring to the special symbol hit determination table for the setting value of 6 (not shown). Note that the setting value is not limited to the "6" level, and can be any level. For example, it may be the "4" level or the "2" level.

In addition, the machine may not have a setting value and may only have the special symbol winning judgment table of FIG. 5 (A-1) (A-2) (may be a machine without a setting). In addition, the machine may have a setting value, but only have the special symbol winning judgment table of FIG. 5 (A-1) (A-2). In other words, there is no problem with having only one setting value and using the same contents of the main control board main processing shown in FIG. 10 as a gaming machine with multiple setting values. Even if there is only one setting value, there is no problem with the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 11 and the setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 12 being performed. In this way, the processing can be shared between a gaming machine with multiple setting values (a setting machine) and a gaming machine with only one setting value (effectively, a non-setting machine), so that the developer's labor can be reduced. In addition, when there is only one setting value, there is no problem with using the same main control board 100 as a gaming machine with multiple setting values (the hardware side may also be shared). This allows for common materials and reduces costs.

In the special symbol hit determination table (for the first starting hole) in FIG. 5 (A-1), when the game state is the normal game state and when the game state is the time-saving game state, the probability that the special symbol hit determination process will determine that there is a special symbol hit is "1/319", and the probability that it will be determined that there is a special symbol miss is "318/319". In addition, regardless of the game state, a ball entering the first starting hole 21 will never be determined as a small hit.

In the special symbol hit determination table (for the second starting slot) in FIG. 5 (A-2), when the game state is the time-saving game state, the probability that the special symbol hit determination process will determine that there is a special symbol hit is "1/319", and the probability that the special symbol will be determined to be a miss is "318/319". In addition, the probability that it will be determined to be a small hit is "1/1".

In the first starting hole 21, the small hit determination process is executed, but it may be set so that it is not determined to be a small hit, or the small hit determination process may not be executed at all. In addition, in the second starting hole 22, it is set so that it is always determined to be a small hit, but it may be determined to be a "miss" in the small hit determination process. For example, it may be set so that it is determined to be a small hit at "1/1.01".

In the special symbol hit determination table for the setting value "6" (not shown), when the game state is the normal game state and when the time-saving game state, the probability of the special symbol hit determination process determining a special symbol hit is "1/280", and the probability of determining a miss is "279/280". In this way, by being able to set different special symbol hit probabilities for each setting value, it becomes easier for the gaming facility to manage the balls dispensed. Note that the small hit probability is the same for all setting values.

In addition, in the time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 5(B) and FIG. 6(B), it is easier to hit a normal symbol in the normal symbol hit determination process compared to the normal game state, and an advantageous opening/closing mode is selected as the opening/closing mode of the protruding member of the second starting hole 22 when a normal symbol hit is hit, so it can be said that the time-saving game state is a more advantageous game state for the player than the normal game state.

In addition, in the time-saving play state, even if the special symbol hit determination process determines that the special symbol is a miss, it is always determined to be a small hit, whereas in the normal play state, it is never determined to be a small hit, so it can be said that the time-saving play state is a more advantageous play state for the player than the normal play state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the gate member 20 is provided on the right side of the play area 7, but not on the left side of the play area 7. If a right-handed hit is made in the normal play state and the game ball passes through the gate member 20, as shown in FIG. 5, a normal win occurs at "4/256", so the protruding member of the second start hole 22 can be opened. However, since the opening time is "0.9S", it is difficult to get the game ball into the second start hole 22, and most of the shot game balls pass through the out hole 25. Therefore, in the normal play state, the optimal play for the player is to hit the game ball from the left and get the game ball to enter the first start hole 21. Therefore, when the gate detection SW 20a detects a game ball in the normal play state, a left-handed hit notification is made to encourage the player to play the game optimally.

If, for example, a right-handed hit is made during normal gameplay, causing the game ball to pass through the gate member 20 and enter the second starting hole 22, the special symbol winning determination process will not be executed. This makes it possible to prevent inappropriate gameplay from being played.

Next, the normal symbol hit determination table in FIG. 5(B) is stored in the main ROM 102. When the game state is the normal game state, the probability of being determined as a normal hit in the normal symbol hit determination process is "4/256", and the probability of being determined as a normal miss is "252/256", and when the game state is the time-saving game state, the probability of being determined as a normal hit in the normal symbol hit determination process is "251/256", and the probability of being determined as a normal miss is "5/256". Therefore, it can be said that the time-saving game state is more likely to be determined as a normal hit in the normal symbol hit determination process than in the normal game state, and is a game state that is advantageous to the player. Note that no set value is set in the normal symbol hit determination table (although the set value is common), but a set value may be set in the same way as in the special symbol hit determination table. For example, a setting value of "6" may make it easier to hit a normal symbol in the normal symbol hit determination process compared to a setting value of "1." Also, in the normal game state, the probability of a normal symbol hit being determined in the normal symbol hit determination process is "4/256," and the probability of a normal symbol miss being determined is "252/256," but this is not limited thereto, and the probability of a normal symbol miss may be "256/256."

Next, the special symbol determination table and the normal symbol determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 6. First, the special symbol determination table in FIG. 6(A) has two tables: (1) a table for the first starting hole 21, which is referred to when determining the special symbol to be displayed on the first special symbol display 27a in the case of a special symbol hit or a special symbol miss as a result of the special symbol hit determination process performed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 21; and (2) a table for the second starting hole 22, which is referred to when determining the special symbol to be displayed on the second special symbol display 27b in the case of a special symbol hit or a special symbol miss as a result of the special symbol hit determination process performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 22. These tables are stored in the main ROM 102. The main CPU 101 refers to the table corresponding to the starting hole into which the game ball entered and determines the special symbol based on the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process.

In this embodiment, the game awarded when a special winning is determined based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 21 is called "jackpot 1 game", the game awarded when a special winning is determined based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 22 is called "jackpot 1 game", the game awarded when a small winning is determined based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 22 is called "small winning game", and the game awarded by executing the second type jackpot transition control process (see FIG. 24) as a result of the execution of the "small winning game" is called "jackpot 2 game". In other words, the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment has a specification called a "type 1 type 2 mixed machine" that has a route to transition to the jackpot game by the special winning and a route to transition to the jackpot game via the small winning game. The "Big Hit 1 Game" is described in detail in FIG. 22, the "Big Hit 2 Game" is described in detail in FIG. 25, and the "Small Hit Game" is described in detail in FIG. 23.

In the special symbol determination table of (1) in FIG. 6(A), when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a special symbol hit, the main CPU 101 determines one of the special symbols from "special symbol A" and "special symbol B". Specifically, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 21, a random number for determining the special symbol is obtained, and one of the special symbols is determined by referring to the obtained random number for determining the special symbol. For example, if the obtained random number for determining the special symbol is "0 to 50", "special symbol A" is determined, and if the obtained random number for determining the special symbol is "51 to 99", "special symbol B" is determined. Then, when the special symbol is determined, the "number of rounds" and "after one big win" (the game state after one big win) are determined univocally. If "special symbol A" is determined, 4 rounds are given as the "number of rounds", and a time-saving game state is given as "after one big win". If "special symbol B" is determined, four rounds are assigned as the "number of rounds," and the normal game state is assigned as "after one play of the jackpot." On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a special symbol miss, the main CPU 101 determines "special symbol C." For "special symbol C," which is a special symbol miss, the "number of rounds" and "after one play of the jackpot" are not set, and for example, if "special symbol C" is determined in the normal game state, the normal game state will continue even after "special symbol C" is confirmed and displayed.

In the special symbol determination table of FIG. 6(A)(2), if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a special symbol hit, the main CPU 101 determines "special symbol D". The specific determination method is the same as that of FIG. 6(A)(1) above, so a description is omitted. If "special symbol D" is determined, 10 rounds are awarded as the "number of rounds", and a time-saving play state is granted as "after one big win". On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a special symbol miss, the main CPU 101 determines "special symbol E".

In this way, when a special winning pattern is hit, the rate at which the time-saving game state is awarded is 51% for the first starting hole 21 and 100% for the second starting hole 22. Therefore, it can be said that it is more advantageous for the player to be awarded one jackpot game based on the ball landing in the second starting hole 22 than to be awarded one jackpot game based on the ball landing in the first starting hole 21.

In this embodiment, no set value is set in the special symbol determination table, but a set value may be set. For example, the special symbol determination rate may be different when the set value is "1" and when the set value is "6". In this case, the rate of entry into the time-saving game state is the same for all set values, but the "number of rounds" may have a different rate for each set value. For example, the set value may be "6" so that a more advantageous number of rounds is more likely to be awarded, or the set value may be "1" so that a more advantageous number of rounds is more likely to be awarded.

In the special symbol determination table of FIG. 6(A)(3), if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, the main CPU 101 determines one of the special symbols, "special symbol F" and "special symbol G". The specific determination method is the same as that of FIG. 6(A)(1) above, so a description is omitted, but the rate at which "special symbol F" is determined is "80/100", and the rate at which "special symbol G" is determined is "20/100". If "special symbol F" is determined, 10 rounds are awarded as the "number of rounds", and a time-saving play state is awarded as "after 2 big wins". On the other hand, if "special symbol G" is determined, 10 rounds are awarded as the "number of rounds", and a normal play state is awarded as "after 2 big wins".

Strictly speaking, the 10 rounds in the special symbol determination table in (3) of FIG. 6(A) are the first round being a small win game, and the second to tenth rounds being big win 2 games. As will be described in detail later in the small win game processing, the condition for moving to the second round and onwards is that the specific area detection SW32c detects a game ball in the first round of small win game. If the specific area detection SW32c does not detect a game ball in the first round of small win game, the game does not move to the second round, but ends with only the small win game, and after the small win game ends, the game moves to the normal game state.

Next, the normal symbol determination table in FIG. 6(B) is stored in the main ROM 102, and is a table that is referenced when determining the normal symbol to be displayed on the normal symbol display 27e when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process based on the game ball passing through the gate member 20 is a normal hit or a normal miss. When the game state is in the normal game state, the main CPU 101 determines "normal symbol A" in the normal symbol determination process performed in the normal symbol related process if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal hit, and determines "normal symbol B" if the result is a normal miss. Also, when the game state is in the time-saving game state, the main CPU 101 determines "normal symbol C" in the normal symbol determination process performed in the normal symbol related process if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal hit, and determines "normal symbol D" if the result is a normal miss.

In addition, for normal symbols, the content to be awarded is uniquely determined, just like the special symbols described above. When "normal symbol A" is determined, the protruding member of the second starting hole 22 opens "1" time in "0.9S", and when "normal symbol B" is determined, the protruding member of the second starting hole 22 does not open. When "normal symbol C" is determined, the protruding member of the second starting hole 22 opens "3" times in "1.8S", and when "normal symbol D" is determined, the protruding member of the second starting hole 22 does not open. Therefore, when a normal symbol is hit, the time-saving game state is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state, because the opening and closing mode of the protruding member of the second starting hole 22 is more advantageous.

The state in which the protruding member of the second starting hole 22 opens "3" times in "1.8S" is referred to as the "electric support state". On the other hand, the state in which the protruding member of the second starting hole 22 opens "1" time in "0.9S" is referred to as the "non-electric support state". For example, when controlling the "electric support state", the main CPU 101 sets "1" in the normal pattern state flag storage area of the main RAM 103, and when controlling the "non-electric support state", the main CPU 101 sets "0" in the normal pattern state flag storage area of the main RAM 103.

Although no set value is provided in the normal symbol determination table, a set value may be provided in the same way as in the special symbol determination table. For example, the probability of being determined to be a normal hit in the normal symbol hit determination process may be different for each set value, and a set value of "6" may be easier to hit than a set value of "1", or vice versa. Also, the opening and closing manner of the second starting hole 22 may be different for each set value. For example, a set value of "6" may open and close in a more favorable manner than a set value of "1", or vice versa.

As described above, since it is more advantageous for the player to be awarded one big win based on a ball entering the second starting hole 22 than to be awarded one big win based on a ball entering the first starting hole 21, in a time-saving game state in which the second starting hole 22 can be opened in "1.8S x 3 times", it is optimal for the player to hit the ball to the right and have the ball enter the second starting hole 22. Also, since a small win is not awarded based on a ball entering the first starting hole 21, but is only awarded based on a ball entering the second starting hole 22, it is more advantageous for the player to have a special symbol hit determination process executed based on a ball entering the second starting hole 22, so in a time-saving game state, it is optimal for the player to hit the ball to the right and have the ball enter the second starting hole 22. Therefore, when the first start hole detection SW21a detects a game ball during time-saving play, a right-hit notification is issued to encourage the player to play in the most optimal way.

Next, Figure 6 (C) shows the details of the rounds for each winning special symbol, where for special symbols A and B, the first major prize opening 24 is open for "29.5 seconds" per round, and this is repeated four times. For special symbol D, the first major prize opening 24 is open for "29.5 seconds" per round, and this is repeated ten times. For special symbols F and G, the second major prize opening 32 is open for "10 seconds" in the first round, and the first major prize opening 31 is open for "29.5 seconds" in the second round, and this is repeated nine times. In addition, in the case of the special symbol F or the special symbol G, for example, if the launch handle 8 is maintained at the second launch strength, the game ball can be made to enter the specific area detection SW 32c in the first round, and can be made to enter the first large prize opening 31 in the second round and after (there is no need to change the launch strength between the first round and the second round and after). This prevents the game from becoming cumbersome for the player.

In addition, in a small win game, if one ball enters the specific area detection SW32c and then nine balls enter the second large winning hole detection SW32a, the small win game may end before 10 seconds have elapsed.

In this embodiment, the game states (other than jackpot 1 game, jackpot 2 game, and small jackpot game) include a normal game state and a time-saving game state. Both the normal game state and the time-saving game state are low probability states (probability of winning a special chart is 1/319), and this embodiment does not include a high probability state. Also, only the time-saving game state is an "electric support state", and the normal game state, jackpot 1 game, jackpot 2 game, and small jackpot game are "non-electric support states".

The time-saving play state ends when the game moves to a big win 1 game or a small win game (first ending condition), and other ending conditions, such as when 100 pattern change games have been played (second ending condition), are set. However, if the game ball has entered the second starting hole 22, even if it is determined that the special pattern has not been won, the game will always win a small win, so the majority of games end with the first ending condition, and as an exception, if the game ball continues to enter the first starting hole 21 during the time-saving play state, the second ending condition may be met.

In this embodiment, the game is configured with only a low probability state, but it may also have a high probability state (probability change game state), a time-saving game state (so-called c time-saving) which is entered when a specific pattern combination is displayed as confirmed, and a time-saving game state (so-called b time-saving) which is entered when a predetermined number of pattern change games are played without being determined to be a special winning pattern.

Next, the special symbol variation pattern table will be described with reference to FIG.
The special symbol variation pattern table in FIG. 7 is stored in the main ROM 102, and is a table to be referred to when determining the variation time in the symbol variation game.

When the game state is the normal game state, and the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a special symbol miss, the main CPU 101 determines one of the variation patterns from "variation pattern 1" to "variation pattern 8". Specifically, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 21, a random number for determining the variation pattern is obtained, and one of the variation patterns is determined by referring to the obtained random number for determining the variation pattern. Note that when the game ball enters the first starting hole 21, a reach determination random number is obtained, and if the reach determination random number corresponds to a random number for executing a reach, one of the variation patterns is determined from "variation pattern 3" to "variation pattern 8", and if the reach determination random number does not correspond to a random number for executing a reach, "variation pattern 1" or "variation pattern 2" is determined. On the other hand, when the game state is the normal game state and the special symbol hit determination process results in a special symbol hit, the main CPU 101 refers to the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern and determines one of the fluctuation patterns from "Fluctuation Pattern 9" to "Fluctuation Pattern 15."

When the fluctuation pattern is determined, the "performance content" and the "fluctuation time" (number of seconds S) are determined univocally. When "fluctuation pattern 1" is determined, "shortened fluctuation" is determined as the "performance content", and "2S" is determined as the "fluctuation time". "Shortened fluctuation" refers to a fluctuation that does not result in a reach and stops the left decorative pattern 26a, the middle decorative pattern 26b, and the right decorative pattern 26c simultaneously. When "fluctuation pattern 2" is determined, "normal fluctuation" is determined as the "performance content", and "7S" is determined as the "fluctuation time". "Normal fluctuation" refers to a fluctuation that does not result in a reach and stops the left decorative pattern 26a, the middle decorative pattern 26b, and the right decorative pattern 26c in order. When "fluctuation pattern 3" is determined, "normal reach" is determined as the "performance content", and "15S" is determined as the "fluctuation time". A "normal reach" is a reach that involves a reach but does not involve any particular development effects (for example, a momentary stop display indicating a miss, followed by a change in the middle decorative pattern 26b). Since the selection rate is low when the special chart is hit and high when the special chart is missed, it is positioned as a reach with a low expectation of a hit on the special chart.

When "variation pattern 4" is determined, "Super Reach 1" is determined as the "performance content" and "40S" is determined as the "variation time". "Super Reach 1" refers to a reach that performs a development performance during the execution of a reach (normal reach) and develops to display a live-action image, for example, on the image display device 26. Since the selection rate when the special chart is hit is higher than that of a "normal reach" and the selection rate when the special chart is missed is lower than that of a "normal reach", it is positioned as a reach with a higher expectation of hitting the special chart than a "normal reach". When "variation pattern 5" is determined, "Super Reach 2" is determined as the "performance content" and "50S" is determined as the "variation time". "Super Reach 2" refers to a reach that performs a development performance during the execution of a reach (normal reach) and displays a live-action image on the image display device 26, for example, at the development destination. Since the selection rate when the special chart is hit is higher than that of a "normal reach" and the selection rate when the special chart is missed is lower than that of a "normal reach", it is positioned as a reach with a higher expectation of hitting the special chart than a "normal reach". Note that the expectation of hitting the special chart may be the same as that of a "Super Reach 1", or it may be positioned as a reach with a higher expectation of hitting the special chart than a "Super Reach 1".

When "variation pattern 6" is determined, "pseudo-ream 2 normal reach" is determined as the "performance content" and "variation time" is determined as "30S". "Pseudo-ream" will be described in detail later, but "pseudo-ream 2 normal reach" is positioned as a reach with a higher expectation of hitting the special chart than "normal reach" alone and a lower expectation of hitting the special chart than "super reach 1, 2". When "variation pattern 7" is determined, "pseudo-ream 3 super reach 1" is determined as the "performance content" and "variation time" is determined as "70S". "Pseudo-ream 3 super reach 1" is positioned as a reach with a higher expectation of hitting the special chart than "super reach 1" alone. When "variation pattern 8" is determined, "pseudo-ream 3 super reach 2" is determined as the "performance content" and "variation time" is determined as "80S". "Pseudo-ream 3 super reach 2" is positioned as a reach with a higher expectation of hitting the special chart than "super reach 2" alone. The only difference between "Variation Pattern 9" to "Variation Pattern 14" and "Variation Pattern 3" to "Variation Pattern 8" is whether the special chart is a miss or a hit, and the presentation content and variation time are the same, so we will omit the explanation.

When "variation pattern 15" is determined, "full rotation reach" is determined as the "performance content" and "variation time" is determined to be "120S". "Full rotation reach" is a reach in which the left decorative pattern 26a, middle decorative pattern 26b, and right decorative pattern 26c are slowly scrolled (variably displayed) while aligned with "111", "222", "333", "444", "555", "666", "777", and "888", and finally "777" is displayed as the final number, for example.

The selectable variation patterns in the case of a special winning combination may be determined by the special symbol that has been determined. For example, variation patterns 9 to 14 may be selectable regardless of whether special symbol A or special symbol B has been determined, and variation pattern 15 may be selected only when special symbol A has been determined. Also, variation patterns 9 to 15 may be selectable regardless of whether special symbol A or special symbol B has been determined.

When the game state is the time-saving game state, the main CPU 101 determines "variation pattern 16" if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a special symbol miss. When "variation pattern 16" is determined, "ultra-shortened variation" is determined as the "presentation content" and "variation time" is determined to be "1S". "Ultra-shortened variation" refers to a variation that does not result in a reach and simultaneously stops the left decorative pattern 26a, the middle decorative pattern 26b, and the right decorative pattern 26c. Note that if the game ball enters the second starting hole 22 in the time-saving game state, a special symbol miss cannot occur, so "variation pattern 16" does not have to be used.

In addition, when the game state is the time-saving game state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, "variation pattern 17" is determined. When "variation pattern 17" is determined, "ultra-shortened variation" is determined as the "presentation content", and "variation time" is determined to be "1S". In other words, in the case of a small hit, the left decorative pattern 26a, the middle decorative pattern 26b, and the right decorative pattern 26c are quickly stopped simultaneously without reaching a winning position.

In addition, when the game state is the time-saving game state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process indicates a special symbol hit, "variation pattern 18" is determined. When "variation pattern 18" is determined, "ultra-shortened variation" is determined as the "presentation content", and "variation time" is determined to be "1S". In other words, when a special symbol hit occurs, the left decorative pattern 26a, the middle decorative pattern 26b, and the right decorative pattern 26c are quickly stopped simultaneously without reaching a winning position.

In this way, in the case of a small win or a special win, the left decorative pattern 26a, the middle decorative pattern 26b, and the right decorative pattern 26c are stopped simultaneously without reaching a winning position, which allows the player to play the "RUSH" (for example, the period from when the game transitions to the time-saving game state until the game transitions to the normal game state by hitting the special pattern G) at a good tempo, giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

When a "left hit" is performed during time-saving play and the game ball enters the first starting hole 21, one of the variation patterns 1 to 15 will be executed depending on the result of the special symbol hit determination process.

The special symbol change patterns are not limited to those shown in FIG. 7, and may further include a plurality of special symbol change patterns. The special symbol change pattern table referenced may also differ depending on the setting value. For example, a special symbol change pattern that is easy to select for each setting value may be provided, or a special symbol change pattern that can only be selected with that setting value may be provided. This allows the player to guess (or understand) what the setting value is from the performance content of the executed special symbol change pattern, which leads to increased interest in the game.

Next, the commands sent from the main control board 100 to the performance control board 200 will be explained based on Figures 8 and 9. Note that Figures 8 and 9 only show the main commands, and there are also commands that are not shown.

The "first special symbol storage designation command" (0 to 4) indicates the number of reserved first special symbols, and is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the performance control board 200 when the number of reserved first special symbols increases or decreases.

The "second special symbol storage command" (0) indicates the number of reserved second special symbols, and is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the performance control board 200 when the number of reserved second special symbols increases or decreases.

The "performance symbol designation command" indicates the type of special symbol to be displayed in a stopped state, and is set in the main RAM 103 and sent to the performance control board 200 when various special symbols are determined and the display of the special symbols begins to change.

The "small win designation command" indicates that a small win has been won, and is set in the main RAM 103 when the variable display of the special symbols begins, and is sent to the performance control board 200. When the performance control board 200 receives this command, it determines the combination of decorative symbols that will notify that a small win has been won.

The "special symbol change pattern designation command" indicates the change time of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 27a or the second special symbol display device 27b, and is set in the main RAM 103 when the display of the special symbol change starts on the first special symbol display device 27a or the second special symbol display device 27b, and is sent to the performance control board 200.

The "special symbol confirmation command" indicates that a special symbol has been stopped and displayed, and is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the performance control board 200 when a special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 27a or the second special symbol display device 27b.

The "normal symbol confirmation command" indicates that the normal symbol has been stopped and displayed, and is set in the main RAM 103 when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 27e, and is sent to the performance control board 200.

The "start hole winning designation command" is used to notify the performance control board 200 in advance that a game ball has won a start hole and the result of the special symbol winning determination process. It is set in the main RAM 103 when a game ball wins the first start hole 21 or the second start hole 22 and is sent to the performance control board 200.

The "large prize opening entry designation command" is for notifying the presentation control board 200 of the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 21 or the second large prize opening 22, and is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the presentation control board 200 when a game ball enters the first large prize opening 21 or the second large prize opening 22.

The "specific area winning designation command" is used to notify the performance control board 200 that a gaming ball has won the specific area detection SW32c, and is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the performance control board 200 when a gaming ball wins the specific area detection SW32c.

The "Opening designation command for special chart winning game" indicates that one big win game is about to start, and is set in the main RAM 103 when one 4-round or 10-round big win game starts, and is sent to the performance control board 200.

The "opening designation command for small win game" indicates that a small win game is about to start, and is set in the main RAM 103 when a small win game starts, and is sent to the performance control board 200. In addition, when a small win game ends and a big win 2 game starts, an opening designation command indicating the start of the big win 2 game may be provided.

The "round designation command" indicates the number of rounds for jackpot 1 play and jackpot 2 play, and is set in the main RAM 103 when a round of play for each jackpot play starts, and is sent to the performance control board 200.

The "Ending designation command for special winning game" indicates that the jackpot 1 game and the jackpot 2 game have ended, and is set in the main RAM 103 when each jackpot game ends and is sent to the performance control board 200.

The "small win game ending designation command" indicates that the small win game is ending, and is set in the main RAM 103 when the small win game ends and is sent to the performance control board 200.

The "normal symbol storage designation command" (0 to 4) indicates the number of reserved normal symbols, and is set in the main RAM 103 and sent to the performance control board 200 when the value stored in the reserved normal symbol number storage area increases or decreases.

The "normal symbol designation command" (normal symbol 0 to 3) indicates the type of normal symbol to be displayed in a stopped state on the normal symbol display 27e, and is set in the main RAM 103 and sent to the performance control board 200 when various normal symbols are determined and the variable display of the normal symbols begins.

The "regular symbol change designation command" indicates the time for which the regular symbol changes on the regular symbol display 27e, and is set in the main RAM 103 when the display of the regular symbol changes begins, and is sent to the performance control board 200.

The "opening command for normal winning" indicates that a normal winning game is about to start, and is set in the main RAM 103 when a normal winning game starts, and is sent to the performance control board 200.

The "normal winning ending designation command" indicates that various normal winning games are ending, and is set in the main RAM 103 when a normal winning game ends, and is sent to the performance control board 200.

The "game state designation command" indicates whether the game is in a normal game state or a time-saving game state, and is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the performance control board 200 when the special symbol starts to change, when the special symbol ends to change (at the start of jackpot 1 game and jackpot 2 game), and when jackpot 1 game and jackpot 2 game end according to each game state designation command. Each game state designation command is also described in detail in the flowchart.

The "power on command" and "power restoration command" (for when waiting for customers, when the special chart is changing, and when a special chart is won) indicate whether or not powering on the pachinko gaming machine 1 involves initialization of the main RAM 103. When the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the power on command or power restoration command corresponding to whether or not the main RAM 103 has been initialized and the gaming status are sent to the performance control board 200.

The "customer waiting state designation command" indicates that the machine is in a customer waiting state in which the variable display of special symbols is not performed, and is set in the main RAM 103 when the machine is in a customer waiting state and is sent to the performance control board 200.

The "error designation command" (various types) indicates that an error has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of error. When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, it is set in the main RAM 103 and sent to the performance control board 200.

The "error removal designation command" (various types) indicates that an error that occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been resolved, and is set in the main RAM 103 and sent to the performance control board 200 when it is detected that various abnormalities have been resolved.

The "setting value designation commands" (1 to 6) indicate the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are sent to the performance control board 200 after the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, specifically after a power-on designation command or a power-restoration designation command is sent, while the setting change process is being executed, or while the setting confirmation process is being executed.

The "setting value changing command" indicates that a setting change process is being executed, and is sent to the performance control board 200 while the setting change process is being executed.
The "setting value checking command" indicates that the setting confirmation process is being executed, and is sent to the performance control board 200 while the setting confirmation process is being executed.
The "setting value confirmation end command" indicates that the setting confirmation process has ended, and is sent to the performance control board 200 while the setting confirmation process is being executed.

Next, we will explain the control processing performed by the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100.

(Regarding the main control board main processing)
10 is a flowchart showing main processing performed in the main control board 100. This processing is started by the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and voltage is supplied from the power supply board 400 to each control board.

(Step S1)
In step S1, the main CPU 101 judges whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a power outage state. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a power outage state, the process of step S1 is repeated, and if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not in a power outage state, the process proceeds to step S2. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a power outage state, the process can be executed using a backup power source (not shown).

(Step S2)
In step S2, the main CPU 101 prohibits interrupts (main control board timer interrupt processing). As a result, the main CPU 101 executes only this processing until an interrupt is permitted in step S18 described later. Then, when the interrupt is prohibited, the processing proceeds to step S3.

After completing the processing of step S2, a signal to stop firing (a firing stop command) may be output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball from being fired while the interrupt is prohibited. Then, in the first main control board timer interrupt processing after the interrupt is permitted in step S18 described below, the firing permission signal may be set to an allowed state.

(Step S3)
In step S3, the main CPU 101 judges whether the RAM clear switch 105 is ON (whether it is pressed down). That is, it judges whether the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is ON (the power supply SW 400a is ON) with the RAM clear switch 105 pressed down. If the RAM clear switch 105 is ON, the process proceeds to step S4, and if the RAM clear switch 105 is not ON, the process proceeds to step S9.

(Step S4)
In step S4, the main CPU 101 judges whether the setting change key is in the setting change position. For example, if it detects that the setting change key is inserted into the setting change keyhole 31 and that the setting change key has been rotated 90 degrees, it judges that the setting change key is in the setting change position, and if it does not detect this, it judges that the setting change key is not in the setting change position. If the result is that the setting change key is in the setting change position, the process proceeds to step S5, and if the setting change key is not in the setting change position, the process proceeds to step S7.

(Step S5)
In step S5, the main CPU 101 executes a set value change process shown in Fig. 11. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 11. Then, when the set value change process ends, the process proceeds to step S6.

(Step S6)
In step S6, the main CPU 101 transmits a power-on command. The power-on command is a command indicating that the RAM clear switch 105 is ON and power is turned on. When the performance control board 200 receives this command, it displays "Power on" on the image display device 26 via the image/sound control unit 200b, and outputs the sound "Power on" from the speaker 10. Then, when the power-on command is transmitted, the process proceeds to step S17.

(Step S7)
In step S7, if the RAM clear switch 105 is ON and the power switch 400a is ON, the main CPU 101 initializes areas 1 and 2 (excluding the setting value storage area) of the main RAM 103. This allows, for example, if the game is in a time-saving game mode when the gaming establishment closes, to resume normal game mode when the gaming establishment opens the next day. After initializing areas 1 and 2 (excluding the setting value storage area) of the main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S8.

(Step S8)
In step S8, the main CPU 101 transmits a power-on command. After transmitting the power-on command, the process proceeds to step S17.

(Step S9)
In step S9, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting change key is in the setting change position. If the setting change key is in the setting change position, the process proceeds to step S10. If the setting change key is not in the setting change position, the process proceeds to step S11.

(Step S10)
In step S10, the main CPU 101 executes a setting value confirmation process shown in Fig. 12. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 12. Then, when the setting value confirmation process ends, the process proceeds to step S11.

(Step S11)
In step S11, the main CPU 101 determines whether there is backed-up data. For example, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, a backup process (not shown) is performed to hold data, store a checksum, and turn on a backup flag. If the backup flag is on, it is determined that there is backed-up data, and if the backup flag is not on, it is determined that there is no backed-up data. If there is backed-up data, the process proceeds to step S12, and if there is no backed-up data, it is determined that this is the first power-on and the process proceeds to step S17.

(Step S12)
In step S12, main CPU 101 calculates a checksum of an area of main RAM 103. Then, after calculating the checksum of the area of main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S13.

(Step S13)
In step S13, the main CPU 101 determines whether the checksum of the area of the main RAM 103 is normal. For example, it determines whether the checksum value stored in a backup process (not shown) matches the checksum value calculated in step S12, and if they match, it determines that the checksum is normal, and if they do not match, it determines that the checksum is abnormal. If the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S15, and if the checksum is abnormal, the process proceeds to step S14.

(Step S14)
In step S14, the main CPU 101 executes a game stop process (error setting). Specifically, it transmits an error command to the performance control board 200 to notify an error using the light emitting device 9, the speaker 10, the image display device 26, etc., and performs a process that makes it impossible to release the error unless the setting value change process of Fig. 13 is performed. Then, it remains in that process unless the setting value change process of Fig. 13 is performed.

(Step S15)
In step S15, the main CPU 101 executes a recovery process. That is, the main CPU 101 restores the normal state to the state before the power outage. Then, when the normal state is restored to the state before the power outage, the process proceeds to step S16.

(Step S16)
In step S16, the main CPU 101 transmits a power restoration command. The power restoration command is a command indicating that the RAM clear switch 105 is OFF and power has been restored (returned to the state before the power failure), and when the performance control board 200 receives this command, it displays "power restoration in progress" on the image display device 26 via the image/sound control unit 200b, for example, and outputs a sound "power restoration in progress" from the speaker 10. Then, when the power restoration command is transmitted, the process proceeds to step S17.

(Step S17)
In step S17, the main CPU 101 executes the setting of the CTC. That is, the setting of the CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) having the function of generating a pulse output at a constant period and the function of measuring time is performed, and the time constant register of the CTC is set so that the main control board timer interrupt processing described later is performed periodically every 4 ms. Then, after executing the setting of the CTC, the process proceeds to step S18.

(Step S18)
In step S18, the main CPU 101 permits an interrupt (sets the game ready). After the interrupt is permitted, the main CPU 101 goes into standby and performs a main control board timer interrupt process (described later) every 4 ms.

(Regarding setting value change processing)
Fig. 11 is a flow chart showing the setting value change processing (subroutine of step S5 of the main control board main processing) performed in the main control board 100. The state in which the processing in Fig. 11 is being performed corresponds to the above-mentioned "setting change state".

(Step S5-1)
In step S5-1, main CPU 101 initializes the areas (excluding the setting value storage area) of main RAM 103. Then, after initializing the areas (excluding the setting value storage area) of main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S5-2.

(Step S5-2)
In step S5-2, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting value changing command. The setting value changing command is a command indicating that a setting value change process is being performed, and when the performance control board 200 receives this command, it causes, for example, the image display device 26 to display "setting changing" via the image/sound control unit 200b, and causes the speaker 10 to output a sound saying "setting changing." Then, when the setting value changing command is transmitted, the process proceeds to step S5-3.

(Step S5-3)
In step S5-3, main CPU 101 reads out the current setting value and displays it on display 104. For example, if the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of main RAM 103 is "1", "1" is displayed on display 104. Then, after reading out the current setting value and displaying it on display 104, processing proceeds to step S5-4.

(Step S5-4)
In step S5-4, main CPU 101 determines whether a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether RAM clear switch 105 is ON. If RAM clear switch 105 is ON, the process proceeds to step S5-5. If RAM clear switch 105 is not ON, the process proceeds to step S5-7.

(Step S5-5)
In step S5-5, the main CPU 101 executes a process of changing the set value. For example, when the set value is "1" and the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON, the set value is changed to "2", when the set value is "2" and the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON, the set value is changed to "3", when the set value is "3" and the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON, the set value is changed to "4", when the set value is "4" and the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON, the set value is changed to "5", when the set value is "5" and the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON, the set value is changed to "6", and when the set value is "6" and the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON, the set value is changed to "1". After changing the set value, the process proceeds to step S5-6.

(Step S5-6)
In step S5-6, the main CPU 101 displays the changed set value on the display 104 (for example, the rightmost segment). For example, when the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the set value "1" is displayed, the set value "2" is displayed; when the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the set value "2" is displayed, the set value "3" is displayed; when the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the set value "3" is displayed, the set value "4" is displayed; when the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the set value "4" is displayed, the set value "5" is displayed; when the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the set value "5" is displayed, the set value "6" is displayed; and when the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the set value "6" is displayed, the set value "1" is displayed. Then, when the changed set value is displayed on the display 104, the process proceeds to step S5-7.

(Step S5-7)
In step S5-7, the main CPU 101 determines whether a setting value confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the setting change key is in a position rotated 90 degrees clockwise (horizontal direction) to a position rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (vertical direction). If a setting value confirmation operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S5-8, and if a setting value confirmation operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S5-4.

(Step S5-8)
In step S5-8, the main CPU 101 stores the setting value in a setting value storage area of the main RAM 103. That is, when the desired setting value is displayed on the display 104, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is confirmed by rotating the setting change key 90 degrees counterclockwise (vertical direction). Thereby, subsequent games are played based on the stored setting value. Then, once the setting value has been stored in the setting value storage area of the main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S5-9.

(Step S5-9)
In step S5-9, the main CPU 101 turns off the display 104. That is, it turns off the display of the setting value that was displayed on the display 104 in step S5-6. Then, after turning off the display 104, the process proceeds to step S5-10.

(Step S5-10)
In step S5-10, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting value designation command. The setting value designation command is a command that indicates information about a setting value, and when the performance control board 200 receives this command, it stores the setting value information in the sub-RAM 203, and refers to the setting value information stored in the sub-RAM 203 when executing the setting value suggestion performance described below. Also, when the performance control board 200 receives this command, it ends the notification such as "settings are being changed" described above. Then, when the setting value designation command is transmitted, the process proceeds to step S6 of the main control board main process.

Note that even when there is one set value, a set value change process may be performed. In step S5-5, for example, the set value may be changed from "1" to "1". In step S5-6, for example, when the set value "1" is displayed, if the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON, the set value "1" may be displayed. In step S5-8, the set value "1" is already stored, but it may be updated and stored.

(Regarding setting value confirmation processing)
Fig. 12 is a flow chart showing the setting value confirmation process (a subroutine of step S10 of the main control board main process) performed in the main control board 100. The state in which the process of Fig. 12 is being performed corresponds to the above-mentioned "setting confirmation state".

(Step S10-1)
In step S10-1, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting value checking command. The setting value checking command is a command indicating that a setting value checking process is being performed, and when the performance control board 200 receives this command, it causes, for example, the image display device 26 to display "setting checking in progress" via the image/sound control unit 200b, and causes the speaker 10 to output a sound saying "setting checking in progress." Then, when the setting value checking command is transmitted, the process proceeds to step S10-2.

(Step S10-2)
In step S10-2, main CPU 101 reads out the current setting value and displays it on display 104. For example, if the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of main RAM 103 is "1", "1" is displayed on display 104. Then, after reading out the current setting value and displaying it on display 104, processing proceeds to step S10-3.

(Step S10-3)
In step S10-3, the main CPU 101 determines whether an end operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the setting change key is in a position rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (vertical direction) from a position rotated 90 degrees clockwise (horizontal direction). If an end operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S10-4, and if an end operation has not been performed, the process loops until an end operation is performed.

(Step S10-4)
In step S10-4, main CPU 101 turns off display 104. That is, it turns off display of the setting value displayed on display 104 in step S10-2. Then, after turning off display 104, the process proceeds to step S10-5.

(Step S10-5)
In step S10-5, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting value check end command. The setting value check end command is a command indicating that the setting value check process has ended, and when the performance control board 200 receives this command, it ends the notification such as "Settings are being checked" described above. Then, when the setting value check end command is transmitted, the process proceeds to step S11 of the main control board main process.

Note that the setting value confirmation process may be performed even when the device has a single setting value. Also, when the device does not have any setting values and is a device without settings, the processes in Figures 11 and 12 may be omitted.

(Main control board timer interrupt processing)
13 is a flowchart showing main control board timer interrupt processing performed in the main control board 100. This processing is executed by periodically (for example, every 4 ms) interrupting the above-mentioned main control board main processing.

(Step S101)
In step S101, the main CPU 101 saves information stored in a register. After saving the information stored in the register, the process proceeds to step S102.

(Step S102)
In step S102, the main CPU 101 executes a time management process for updating a timer used in the game (for example, the opening time of the first big winning port 24, etc.). Then, after updating the timer used in the game, the process proceeds to step S103.

(Step S103)
In step S103, the main CPU 101 executes updating of initial value random numbers such as random number values for determining whether a special symbol has won, random numbers for determining special symbols, random numbers for determining a variation pattern, etc. Then, when the various random number updating processes are completed, the process proceeds to step S104.

(Step S104)
In step S104, the main CPU 101 detects input from each switch shown in Fig. 4. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 14. Then, when an input from each switch is detected, the process proceeds to step S105.

(Step S105)
In step S105, the main CPU 101 executes a process related to the special symbols. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 18. Then, when the process related to the special symbols is completed, the process proceeds to step S106.

(Step S106)
In step S106, the main CPU 101 executes a process related to the normal symbol. For example, when the game ball passes through the gate member 20, the main CPU 101 executes a "normal symbol hit determination process" to determine the normal symbol and the normal symbol variation time. Then, when the process related to the normal symbol is completed, the process proceeds to step S107.

(Step S107)
In step S107, the main CPU 101 executes processing related to the payout of game balls. For example, when the entry of a game ball is detected in the input SW detection processing in step S104, a payout command signal is set in a payout command transmission area in order to send a payout command signal to the payout control board 300 to pay out the corresponding prize ball, and a payout completion signal is received from the payout control board 300. Then, when the processing related to the payout of game balls is completed, the process proceeds to step S108.

(Step S108)
In step S108, the main CPU 101 executes an abnormality determination process. For example, it determines whether the magnetic sensor 27h detects an abnormal magnetism, whether the radio wave sensor 27i detects an abnormal radio wave, etc., and executes a process for issuing an error notification if an abnormality is detected. Then, when the abnormality determination process ends, the process proceeds to step S109.

(Step S109)
In step S109, the main CPU 101 executes a process of transmitting various commands to the performance control board 200. For example, in this process, the main CPU 101 checks whether a command has been set in a command transmission area provided in the main control board 100, and if a command has been set, transmits the set command to the performance control board 200 or the payout control board 300. Then, when the command transmission process is completed, the process proceeds to step S110.

(Step S110)
In step S110, the main CPU 101 performs display control (variable display and fixed display) of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 27a if the pattern change game is based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 21, and executes display control (variable display and fixed display) of special symbols on the second special symbol display device 27b if the pattern change game is based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 22. Then, when the display control of special symbols is finished, the process proceeds to step S111.

(Step S111)
In step S111, the main CPU 101 executes display control (variable display and fixed display) of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 27e. In addition, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate member 20 and the normal symbol variable game has ended, the main CPU 101 also executes display control of the normal symbol reserved display 27f. Then, when the display control of the normal symbol is ended, the process proceeds to step S112.

(Step S112)
In step S112, the main CPU 101 executes a game performance information management process. Specifically, the main CPU 101 calculates game performance information using the above-mentioned formula of "(number of paid-out game balls in normal game state ÷ number of out balls in normal game state) × 100" and executes a process of displaying the calculated game performance information on the display 104. Then, when the game performance information management process is completed, the process proceeds to step S113.

(Step S113)
In step S113, the main CPU 101 restores the information saved in step S101 to the register. After restoring the saved information to the register, the main control board timer interrupt process ends.

(Input SW detection process)
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the input SW detection processing performed in the main control board 100 (a subroutine of step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt processing).

(Step S104-1)
In step S104-1, the main CPU 101 executes a process when the first start hole is detected. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 15. Then, when the process when the first start hole is detected is completed, the process proceeds to step S104-2.

(Step S104-2)
In step S104-2, when the main CPU 101 receives information that a game ball has been detected from the second start hole detection SW 22a, the main CPU 101 executes a process at the time of detection of the second start hole. This process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 16. Then, when the process at the time of detection of the second start hole is completed, the process proceeds to step S104-3.

(Step S104-3)
In step S104-3, when the main CPU 101 receives information that a game ball has been detected from the normal winning hole detection SW 23a, the main CPU 101 executes a process of setting a payout command signal in a payout command transmission area in order to have the payout control board 300 pay out eight game balls as prize balls. Then, when the normal winning hole detection process is completed, the process proceeds to step S104-4.

(Step S104-4)
In step S104-4, when the main CPU 101 receives information indicating that a game ball has entered the first large prize opening detection SW 24a, the main CPU 101 executes a process of setting a payout command signal in a payout command transmission area in order to have the payout control board 300 pay out 15 game balls as prize balls. In addition, in order to notify the fact that a game ball has entered the first large prize opening 24 using the image display device 26 or the like, a large prize opening entry designation command is set in the command transmission area. For example, when more than 10 game balls are detected by the first large prize opening detection SW 24a per round (also called over entry), the notification using the image display device 26 or the like may be notified by a display to that effect using the image display device 26 or a sound (for example, a "Yay!" sound) using the speaker 10, or a winning emphasis performance (described later). Then, when the first large prize opening detection process is completed, the process proceeds to step S104-5.

(Step S104-5)
In step S104-5, the main CPU 101 executes the second large prize opening detection process. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 17. Then, when the second large prize opening detection process ends, the process proceeds to step S104-6.

(Step S104-6)
In step S104-6, when the main CPU 101 receives information indicating that a game ball has entered the game ball from the gate detection SW 20a, the main CPU 101 executes a process when a passing gate is detected. Then, when the process when a passing gate is detected is completed, the process proceeds to step S105 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Processing when the first starting port is detected)
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the processing performed in the main control board 100 when the first starting hole is detected (a subroutine of step S104-1 of the input SW detection processing).

(Step S104-1-1)
In step S104-1-1, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the first start hole detection SW 21a has input information indicating that a game ball has entered the game hole. If the first start hole detection SW 21a has input information indicating that a game ball has entered the game hole, the process proceeds to step S104-1-2. If the first start hole detection SW 21a has not input information indicating that a game ball has entered the game hole, the process proceeds to step S104-2 of the input SW detection process.

(Step S104-1-2)
In step S104-1-2, the main CPU 101 sets a prize ball command in the payout command transmission area to cause the payout control board 300 to pay out three game balls as prize balls for the game ball entering the first starting hole 21. Then, after setting the prize ball command, the process proceeds to step S104-1-3.

(Step S104-1-3)
In step S104-1-3, the main CPU 101 judges whether the above-mentioned "fourth memory area" has been stored. In other words, it judges whether the number of reserved symbol variation games in the first starting hole 21 is "4". If the "fourth memory area" has been stored, the process proceeds to step S104-2 of the input SW detection process, and if the "fourth memory area" has not been stored, the process proceeds to step S104-1-4.

(Step S104-1-4)
In step S104-1-4, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number value for determining whether or not a special symbol has been won. The random number value acquired in this process is used in the winning determination process (step S104-1-8) and the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19), which will be described later. After acquiring the random number value for determining whether or not a special symbol has been won, the process proceeds to step S104-1-5.

(Step S104-1-5)
In step S104-1-5, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number value for determining a special symbol. The random number value acquired in this process is used in the winning determination process (step S104-1-8) and the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19) described later. After acquiring the random number value for determining a special symbol, the process proceeds to step S104-1-6.

(Step S104-1-6)
In step S104-1-6, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number value for determining the special symbol variation pattern. The random number value acquired in this process will be used in the winning determination process (step S104-1-8) and the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19) described later. After acquiring the random number value for determining the special symbol variation pattern, the process proceeds to step S104-1-7.

The random number values for determining whether a special symbol has been hit, for determining the special symbol, and for determining the special symbol variation pattern may be obtained prior to step S104-1-3. If it is determined in step S104-1-3 that the "fourth memory area" has been filled, the obtained random number values may be discarded.

(Step S104-1-7)
In step S104-1-7, the main CPU 101 stores the random number value for determining whether or not a special symbol has been hit, the random number value for determining whether or not a special symbol has been hit, and the random number value for determining whether or not a special symbol has changed, in an available memory area as determination information. For example, if the values are stored up to the "third memory area" and the "fourth memory area" is available, the random number values are stored in the "fourth memory area." Once the random number values have been stored in the available memory area, the process proceeds to step S104-1-8.

(Step S104-1-8)
In step S104-1-8, the main CPU 101 executes a winning time determination process. This winning time determination process is a process for determining whether the random number value acquired in step S104-1-4 is a special symbol winning value, prior to the special symbol winning time determination process in the special symbol variation start time process (see FIG. 19). As a result, for example, if the random number value for special symbol winning time determination stored in the "fourth memory area" in step S104-1-7 is a special symbol winning time, a notice performance ("pre-reading performance" described later) can be executed across multiple variations. Then, when the winning time determination process is completed, the process proceeds to step S104-1-9.

(Step S104-1-9)
In step S104-1-9, the main CPU 101 sets the first start port winning designation command in the command transmission area in order to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 200. The first start port winning designation command also includes information on the judgment result of the winning time judgment process in step S104-1-8, and by receiving this command, the performance control board 200 can recognize whether the judgment result of the winning time judgment process is a hit or a miss. Then, after setting the first start port winning designation command, the process proceeds to step S104-1-10.

(Step S104-1-10)
In step S104-1-10, the main CPU 101 sets the first special symbol storage designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the first special symbol storage designation command to the performance control board 200. Then, when the first special symbol storage designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S104-2 of the input SW detection process.

(Regarding processing when the second starting port is detected)
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the processing performed in the main control board 100 when the second starting hole is detected (a subroutine of step S104-2 of the input SW detection processing).

(Step S104-2-1)
In step S104-2-1, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the information on the detection of the game ball entering has been input from the second start hole detection SW 22a. If the information on the detection of the game ball entering has been input from the second start hole detection SW 22a, the process proceeds to step S104-2-2. If the information on the detection of the game ball entering has not been input from the second start hole detection SW 22a, the process proceeds to step S104-3 of the input SW detection process.

(Step S104-2-2)
In step S104-2-2, the main CPU 101 sets a prize ball command in the payout command transmission area to cause the payout control board 300 to pay out two game balls as prize balls for the game ball entering the second starting hole 22. Then, after setting the prize ball command, the process proceeds to step S104-2-3.

(Step S104-2-3)
In step S104-2-3, the main CPU 101 judges whether it is stored in the "variable memory area". In other words, it judges whether a pattern variation game based on a ball entering the second starting hole 22 is being executed. If it is stored in the "variable memory area", the process proceeds to step S104-3 of the input SW detection process, and if it is not stored in the "variable memory area", the process proceeds to step S104-2-4.

(Step S104-2-4)
In step S104-2-4, the main CPU 101 obtains a random number value for determining whether or not a special symbol has won. After obtaining the random number value for determining whether or not a special symbol has won, the process proceeds to step S104-2-5.

(Step S104-2-5)
In step S104-2-5, the main CPU 101 obtains a random number value for determining a special symbol. After obtaining the random number value for determining a special symbol, the process proceeds to step S104-2-6.

(Step S104-2-6)
In step S104-2-6, the main CPU 101 obtains a random number value for determining a special symbol variation pattern. After obtaining the random number value for determining a special symbol variation pattern, the process proceeds to step S104-2-7.

The random number value for determining whether a special symbol has been hit, the random number value for determining the special symbol, and the random number value for determining the special symbol variation pattern may be obtained prior to step S104-2-3. If it is determined in step S104-2-3 that the random number value is stored in the "variable memory area," the obtained random number value may be discarded.

(Step S104-2-7)
In step S104-2-7, the main CPU 101 stores the random number value for determining whether or not a special symbol has won, the random number value for determining whether or not a special symbol has been won, and the random number value for determining whether or not a special symbol has changed in the changeable memory area as determination information. After storing each random number value in the free changeable memory area, the process proceeds to step S104-2-8.

(Step S104-2-8)
In step S104-2-8, the main CPU 101 sets the second start port winning designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 200. Then, when the second start port winning designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S104-2-9.

(Step S104-2-9)
In step S104-2-9, the main CPU 101 sets the second special symbol storage designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the second special symbol storage designation command to the performance control board 200. Then, when the second special symbol storage designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S104-2 of the input SW detection process.

(Processing when the second big winning hole is detected)
FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the processing carried out in the main control board 100 when the second large prize opening is detected (a subroutine of step S104-5 of the input SW detection processing).

(Step S104-5-1)
In step S104-5-1, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not information on the detection of a game ball entering the game area has been input from the specific area detection SW 32c. If information on the detection of a game ball entering the game area has been input from the specific area detection SW 32c, the process proceeds to step S104-5-2. If information on the detection of a game ball entering the game area has not been input from the specific area detection SW 32c, the process proceeds to step S104-5-8.

(Step S104-5-2)
In step S104-5-2, the main CPU 101 sets a prize ball command in the payout command transmission area to have the payout control board 300 pay out 15 game balls as prize balls for the game ball entering the specific area detection SW 32c. After setting the prize ball command, the process proceeds to step S104-5-3.

(Step S104-5-3)
In step S104-5-3, the main CPU 101 obtains a random number value for determining a special symbol. After obtaining the random number value for determining a special symbol, the process proceeds to step S104-5-4.

(Step S104-5-4)
In step S104-5-4, the main CPU 101 executes a process for determining a small win special symbol. For example, if the random number value for determining the special symbol obtained in step S104-5-3 is "0 to 79", the special symbol F is determined, and if the random number value for determining the special symbol obtained in step S104-5-3 is "80 to 99", the special symbol G is determined. Then, when the small win special symbol is determined, the process proceeds to step S104-5-5.

(Step S104-5-5)
In step S104-5-5, the main CPU 101 sets a performance pattern designation command in the command transmission area to make the performance control board 200 recognize the determined special pattern. For example, if the special pattern F is determined, a "special pattern F performance pattern designation command" is set, and if the special pattern G is determined, a "special pattern G performance pattern designation command" is set. Then, when the performance pattern designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-5-6 of the special pattern variation start processing.

(Step S104-5-6)
In step S104-5-6, the main CPU 101 turns ON the specific area passage flag in the specific area passage flag storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, after turning ON the specific area passage flag, the process proceeds to step S104-5-7.

(Step S104-5-7)
In step S104-5-7, the main CPU 101 sets the specific area winning designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the specific area winning designation command to the performance control board 200. The performance control board 200 that receives the command performs a performance (for example, "V Winning!") to notify the user that the game ball has passed through the specific area via the image/sound control unit 200b. Then, when the specific area winning designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S104-6 of the input SW detection process.

(Step S104-5-8)
In step S104-5-8, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the second large winning hole detection SW 32a has input information indicating that a game ball has entered the game hole. If the second large winning hole detection SW 32a has input information indicating that a game ball has entered the game hole, the process proceeds to step S104-5-9. If the second large winning hole detection SW 32a has not input information indicating that a game ball has entered the game hole, the process proceeds to step S104-6 of the input SW detection process.

(Step S104-5-9)
In step S104-5-9, the main CPU 101 sets a prize ball command in the payout command transmission area to have the payout control board 300 pay out 15 game balls as prize balls for the game ball that entered the second large winning hole detection SW 32a. Then, when the prize ball command is set, the process proceeds to step S104-6 of the input SW detection process.

(Regarding special pattern related processing)
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special symbol-related processing performed in the main control board 100 (a subroutine of step S105 of the main control board timer interrupt processing).

(Step S105-1)
In step S105-1, the main CPU 101 judges whether a flag indicating a stopped state is stored in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. For example, when the main CPU 101 starts the variation of the special symbol, it sets the value "1" indicating the variation in the special symbol state flag storage area (step S105-2-12 in FIG. 19 described later), and when it stops the variation of the special symbol, it sets the value "0" indicating the stopped state in the special symbol state flag storage area (step S105-4-3 in FIG. 21 described later). After setting the value "0" indicating the stopped state, if the special symbol is a hit, the value "2" indicating a big hit 1 game is set, and if the small hit game is a hit, the value "3" indicating a small hit game is set. If the value "0" indicating that the device is stopped is set, the process proceeds to step S105-2. If the value "0" indicating that the device is stopped is not set, the process proceeds to step S105-3.

(Step S105-2)
In step S105-2, the main CPU 101 executes special symbol variation start processing. This processing will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 19. Then, when the special symbol variation start processing is completed, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-3)
In step S105-3, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not a flag indicating that the symbol is changing is stored in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. If the value "1" indicating that the symbol is changing is set, the process proceeds to step S105-4, and if the value "1" indicating that the symbol is changing is not set, the process proceeds to step S105-5.

(Step S105-4)
In step S105-4, the main CPU 101 executes a special symbol variation process. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 20. Then, when the special symbol variation process ends, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5)
In step S105-5, the main CPU 101 judges whether a flag indicating one big win game is stored in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. If the value "2" indicating one big win game is set, the process proceeds to step S105-6, and if the value "2" indicating one big win game is not set, the process proceeds to step S105-7.

(Step S105-6)
In step S105-6, the main CPU 101 performs a jackpot 1 game process. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 22. Then, when the jackpot 1 game process ends, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-7)
In step S105-7, the main CPU 101 judges whether a flag indicating a small win game is stored in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. If the value "3" indicating a small win game is set, the process proceeds to step S105-8, and if the value "3" indicating a small win game is not set, the process proceeds to step S105-9.

(Step S105-8)
In step S105-8, the main CPU 101 performs a small win game process. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 23. Then, when the small win game process ends, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-9)
In step S105-9, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value "0" indicating stopped is not set, and that the value "1" indicating fluctuating is not set, and that the value "2" indicating jackpot 1 play is not set, and that the value "3" indicating small win play is not set, it determines that the value "4" indicating jackpot 2 play is set, and performs jackpot 2 play processing. This processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 25. Then, when the jackpot 2 play processing is completed, the processing proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Regarding the processing at the start of special symbol fluctuation)
FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start processing performed in the main control board 100 (a subroutine of step S105-2 of the special symbol related processing).

(Step S105-2-1)
In step S105-2-1, the main CPU 101 judges whether there is any memory in the variable memory area of the symbol variable game corresponding to the second starting hole 22 provided in the main RAM 103. If there is any memory in the variable memory area, the process proceeds to step S105-2-6, and if there is no memory in the variable memory area, the process proceeds to step S105-2-2.

(Step S105-2-2)
In step S105-2-2, the main CPU 101 determines whether there is a reservation in the reservation memory area corresponding to the first start port 21 provided in the main RAM 103. If there is a reservation corresponding to the first start port 21, the process proceeds to step S105-2-3, and if there is no reservation corresponding to the first start port 21, the process proceeds to step S105-2-5.

(Step S105-2-3)
In step S105-2-3, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the number of reserved positions in the first starting hole 21. The subtraction corresponds to sliding the judgment information (random value) in the "variable memory area" to the "fourth memory area" and then emptying the memory area of "1". Accordingly, the display of the first special symbol reserved indicator 27c also changes to a display mode corresponding to the number of reserved positions (from "blinking" to "lit", or from "lit" to "off"). Then, after subtracting "1" from the number of reserved positions in the first starting hole 21, the process proceeds to step S105-2-4.

(Step S105-2-4)
In step S105-2-4, the main CPU 101 sets a first special symbol storage designation command in the command transmission area in order to subtract the reserved number managed by the performance control board 200. Then, when the first special symbol storage designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-2-6.

(Step S105-2-5)
In step S105-2-5, the main CPU 101 sets a customer waiting state designation command in the command transmission area in order to display a "Waiting for customers" screen on the image display device 26. Then, after setting the customer waiting state designation command, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

The "Waiting for Customers" screen is, for example, a state in which the sub-patterns and background images displayed in the most recently ended pattern-changing game, the variable icon display area 26o, the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j are displayed, and, for example, an image that notifies the user that the volume and light intensity can be adjusted (for example, a level gauge image or an image that resembles a cross key button) is further added and displayed. Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed in the "Waiting for Customers" screen, a "demo performance" is executed. In the "demo performance", the sub-patterns and background images displayed in the "Waiting for Customers" screen, the variable icon display area 26o, the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j are not displayed, and, for example, the entire display area is used to display the model name, manufacturer name, and caution information to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game. Then, once a certain amount of time has elapsed during the "demo performance," the venue will once again switch to "waiting for customers."

It is also possible not to send the waiting state designation command. In this case, the performance control board 200 measures the time from the end of the previous pattern change game, and if a predetermined time is measured without receiving a new start command (such as a special pattern change pattern designation command), the "Waiting for customers" screen is displayed. In this way, the waiting state designation command becomes unnecessary, which makes it possible to reduce commands and simplify control.

(Step S105-2-6)
In step S105-2-6, if the main CPU 101 reaches this process after performing step S105-2-1, it executes the special symbol winning determination process using the determination information (random number value) acquired and stored in the second start hole detection process, while if the main CPU 101 reaches this process after performing step S105-2-4, it executes the special symbol winning determination process using the determination information (random number value) acquired and stored in the first start hole detection process. This process will be described in detail later using FIG. 20. Then, when the special symbol winning determination process is completed, the process proceeds to step S105-2-7.

(Step S105-2-7)
In step S105-2-7, the main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern of the special symbols in the symbol variation game (using the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 7). Then, when the variation pattern of the special symbols is determined, the process proceeds to step S105-2-8.

(Step S105-2-8)
In step S105-2-8, the main CPU 101 sets a special symbol variation pattern designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit a command indicating the special symbol variation pattern determined in step S105-2-7 to the performance control board 200. For example, if "variation pattern 9" is determined in step S105-2-7, a special symbol variation pattern designation command indicating "variation pattern 9" is set. Then, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-2-9.

(Step S105-2-9)
In step S105-2-9, the main CPU 101 sets the fluctuation time (see FIG. 7) corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation pattern determined in step S105-2-7 in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. For example, if "fluctuation pattern 9" is determined, the fluctuation time "15S" is set. After the fluctuation time is set, the process proceeds to step S105-2-10.

(Step S105-2-10)
In step S105-2-10, the main CPU 101 sets the value "1" indicating that the special symbol is changing in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. This allows the player to recognize that the special symbol is changing. In addition, in this process, the subtraction of the change time set in step S105-2-9 is started. Then, when the value "1" indicating that the special symbol is changing is set in the special symbol state flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

In the explanation of Figure 19 above, if there is judgment information for the second starting hole 22 in step S105-2-1, the special pattern hit judgment process is executed in priority to the first starting hole 21, but the special pattern hit judgment process may be executed in the order in which the balls enter the first starting hole 21 and the second starting hole 22.

(Regarding the special symbol winning judgment process)
FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the special symbol winning determination process carried out in the main control board 100 (a subroutine of step S105-2-6 of the special symbol variation start processing).

(Step S105-2-6-1)
In step S105-2-6-1, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the special drawing is a winning combination. In other words, it judges whether the random number value for winning judgment in the judgment information (random number value) matches the random number value for winning the special drawing. If the special drawing is a winning combination, the process proceeds to step S105-2-6-2. If the special drawing is not a winning combination, the process proceeds to step S105-2-6-3.

(Step S105-2-6-2)
In step S105-2-6-2, the main CPU 101 determines the special symbol. That is, the special symbol is determined using a random number value for determining the special symbol and a special symbol determination table. Then, when the special symbol is determined, the process proceeds to step S105-2-6-6.

(Step S105-2-6-3)
In step S105-2-6-3, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not it is a small win. That is, it judges whether the random number value for winning judgment in the judgment information (random number value) matches the random number value for winning the small win. Then, if it is a small win, the process proceeds to step S105-2-6-4, and if it is not a small win, the process proceeds to step S105-2-6-5.

(Step S105-2-6-4)
In step S105-2-6-4, the main CPU 101 sets a small win designation command in the command transmission area to make the performance control board 200 recognize that a small win has been won. Then, when the small win designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-2-7 of the special symbol variation start time process.

(Step S105-2-6-5)
In step S105-2-6-5, the main CPU 101 determines the losing special symbol. That is, the losing special symbol is determined using a random number value for determining the special symbol and a special symbol determination table. Then, when the losing special symbol is determined, the process proceeds to step S105-2-6-7.

(Step S105-2-6-6)
In step S105-2-6-6, the main CPU 101 sets a performance pattern designation command in the command transmission area to make the performance control board 200 recognize the determined special pattern. For example, when the special pattern A is determined, a "special pattern A performance pattern designation command" is set. Then, when the performance pattern designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-2-7 of the special pattern variation start processing.

(Step S105-2-6-7)
In step S105-2-6-7, the main CPU 101 sets a performance pattern designation command in the command transmission area to make the performance control board 200 recognize the determined special pattern. For example, when the special pattern C is determined, a "special pattern C performance pattern designation command" is set. Then, when the performance pattern designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-2-7 of the special pattern variation start processing.

(Regarding processing during special pattern changes)
FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variable processing carried out in the main control board 100 (a subroutine of step S105-4 of the special symbol related processing).

(Step S105-4-1)
In step S105-4-1, the main CPU 101 judges whether the set variation time has elapsed in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. For example, when "variation pattern 9" is determined and "15S" is set, it judges whether "15S" has elapsed. Then, if the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S105-4-2, and if the variation time of the special symbol has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-4-2)
In step S105-4-2, the main CPU 101 sets a special symbol determination command in the command transmission area in order to transmit a special symbol determination command for stopping the sub-symbols being variably displayed on the image display device 26 to the performance control board 200. Then, when the special symbol determination command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-4-3.

(Step S105-4-3)
In step S105-4-3, the main CPU 101 sets the value "0" indicating that the special symbol is stopped in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. This allows the main CPU 101 to recognize that the special symbol is stopped. Then, when the value "0" indicating that the special symbol is stopped is set in the special symbol state flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S105-4-4.

(Step S105-4-4)
In step S105-4-4, the main CPU 101 judges whether the judgment result of step S105-2-6 in Fig. 19 is a special winning. If it is a special winning, the process proceeds to step S105-4-5. If it is not a special winning, the process proceeds to step S105-4-10.

(Step S105-4-5)
In step S105-4-5, the main CPU 101 sets the value (2) indicating "jackpot 1" in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. This allows the player to recognize that the player is in jackpot 1 (jackpot 1 game). Then, when the value (2) indicating "jackpot 1" is set in the special symbol state flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S105-4-6.

(Step S105-4-6)
In step S105-4-6, the main CPU 101 sets "0" indicating the "non-electric support state" in the normal symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. As a result, the "non-electric support state" is established during the first big win game. Then, after setting "0" indicating the "non-electric support state", the process proceeds to step S105-4-7.

(Step S105-4-7)
In step S105-4-7, the main CPU 101 transitions to a jackpot 1 game opening that notifies the user that a jackpot 1 game has started. For example, the jackpot state storage area of the main RAM 103 stores the state of a jackpot 1 game, and if it is an opening, "0" is set, if the first big prize winning port 24 is open, "1" is set, if it is an interval between rounds, "2" is set, and if it is an ending, "3" is set. Then, after transitioning to the jackpot 1 game opening, the process transitions to step S105-4-8.

(Step S105-4-8)
In step S105-4-8, the main CPU 101 sets an opening designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit an opening designation command for executing a presentation corresponding to the opening of one big win game to the presentation control board 200. For example, when the special symbol A is determined, an opening designation command for a game with a 4R special symbol is set, and when the special symbol D is determined, an opening designation command for a game with a 10R special symbol is set. Then, when the opening designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-4-9.

(Step S105-4-9)
In step S105-4-9, the main CPU 101 sets a time corresponding to the opening of the jackpot 1 game (for example, "10S") in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. Then, when the time corresponding to the opening of the jackpot 1 game is set, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-4-10)
In step S105-4-10, the main CPU 101 judges whether the result of the judgment in step S105-2-6 in Fig. 19 is a small win or not. If it is a small win, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11, and if it is not a small win, the process proceeds to step S105-4-16.

(Step S105-4-11)
In step S105-4-11, the main CPU 101 sets a value (3) indicating "small win" in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. This allows the player to recognize that a small win is occurring (small win game). Then, when the value (3) indicating "small win" is set in the special symbol state flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S105-4-12.

(Step S105-4-12)
In step S105-4-12, the main CPU 101 sets "0" indicating the "non-electric support state" in the normal symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. As a result, the "non-electric support state" is established during the first big win game. Then, after setting "0" indicating the "non-electric support state", the process proceeds to step S105-4-13.

(Step S105-4-13)
In step S105-4-13, the main CPU 101 transitions to a small win game opening that notifies the user that a small win game has started. For example, the small win game state is stored in the small win state storage area of the main RAM 103, and if it is the opening, "0" is set, if the second large winning opening 32 is open, "1" is set, and if it is the ending, "2" is set. Then, after transitioning to the small win game opening, the process transitions to step S105-4-14.

(Step S105-4-14)
In step S105-4-14, the main CPU 101 sets an opening designation command for a small win in the command transmission area in order to transmit an opening designation command for executing a presentation corresponding to the opening of a small win game to the presentation control board 200. Then, when the opening designation command for a small win is set, the process proceeds to step S105-4-15.

(Step S105-4-15)
In step S105-4-15, the main CPU 101 sets a time corresponding to the opening of the small win game (for example, "10S") in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. Then, when the time corresponding to the opening of the small win game is set, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-4-16)
In step S105-4-16, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the time-saving count counter is set to a time-saving count. If the time-saving count counter is set to a time-saving count, the process proceeds to step S105-4-17. If the time-saving count counter is not set to a time-saving count, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-4-17)
In step S105-4-17, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the time-saving number in the time-saving number counter. Then, after subtracting 1 from the time-saving number, the process proceeds to step S105-4-18.

(Step S105-4-18)
In step S105-4-18, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the time-saving count counter after subtracting 1 is 0. If the value of the time-saving count counter after subtraction is 0, the process proceeds to step S105-4-19, and if the value of the time-saving count counter after subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-4-19)
In step S105-4-19, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state to the normal gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 101 stores "0", which indicates the normal gaming state, in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, when the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step S105-4-20.

(Step S105-4-20)
In step S105-4-20, the main CPU 101 sets a game state designation command (normal) in the command transmission area in order to transmit the game state designation command (normal) indicating that the game is in a normal game state to the performance control board 200. Then, when the game state designation command (normal) is set, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(About the jackpot 1 game process)
FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the jackpot 1 game processing carried out in the main control board 100 (a subroutine of step S105-6 of the special symbol related processing).

(Step S105-6-1)
In step S105-6-1, the main CPU 101 judges whether the opening is in progress. That is, it judges whether "0", which indicates the opening, is set in the jackpot status storage area of the main RAM 103. If the opening is in progress, the process proceeds to step S105-6-2. If the opening is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S105-6-4.

(Step S105-6-2)
In step S105-6-2, the main CPU 101 judges whether the time corresponding to the opening (for example, "10S") has elapsed. If the time corresponding to the opening has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S105-6-3, and if the time corresponding to the opening has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-6-3)
In step S105-6-3, the main CPU 101 drives the first large prize opening opening solenoid 24b to open the first large prize opening 24. In addition, the main CPU 101 sets the opening time to 29.5 S in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. In addition, the round designation command (first opening) is set in the command transmission area. This starts the first round of the first large prize game. Then, when the first large prize opening 24 is opened, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-6-4)
In step S105-6-4, the main CPU 101 judges whether the first large prize opening is being opened. It judges whether "1" indicating that the large prize opening is being opened is set in the large prize status storage area of the main RAM 103. If the large prize opening is being opened, the process proceeds to step S105-6-5. If the large prize opening is not being opened, the process proceeds to step S105-6-7.

(Step S105-6-5)
In step S105-6-5, the main CPU 101 determines whether either of the first large prize opening closing conditions is met, that is, whether 29.5 S has elapsed with the first large prize opening 24 open without the first large prize opening detection SW 24a detecting 10 balls entering, or whether the first large prize opening detection SW 24a has detected 10 balls entering. If the first large prize opening closing condition is met, the process proceeds to step S105-6-6, and if the first large prize opening closing condition is not met, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-6-6)
In step S105-6-6, the main CPU 101 transitions to the inter-round interval that constitutes the period from when the first large prize opening 24 is closed until the next opening. Then, when transitioning to the inter-round interval, the main control board timer interrupt process transitions to step S106.

When transitioning to the round interval, the interval time is set in the counter. This interval time is set to 2.5 seconds for special pattern A and special pattern B, and 0.5 seconds for special pattern D, with a shorter interval time being set for special pattern D.

(Step S105-6-7)
In step S105-6-7, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not it is during the inter-round interval. That is, it judges whether or not "2" indicating the inter-round interval is set in the jackpot status storage area of the main RAM 103. If it is during the inter-round interval, the process proceeds to step S105-6-8, and if it is not during the inter-round interval, the process proceeds to step S105-6-12.

(Step S105-6-8)
In step S105-6-8, the main CPU 101 judges whether it is the end of the final round. For example, in step S105-6-10 described below, if the number of remaining rounds is "0" as a result of updating the number of rounds, it is judged in this process that it is the end of the final round. If it is the end of the final round, the process proceeds to step S105-6-9, and if it is not the end of the final round, the process proceeds to step S105-6-10.

(Step S105-6-9)
In step S105-6-9, the main CPU 101 transitions to an ending that notifies the end of the first big win game. In this process, the time corresponding to the ending of the first big win game (for example, 14S) is set in the time management counter of the main RAM 103, and an ending designation command corresponding to the special symbol is set in the command transmission area. Then, when the transition to the ending is made, the process transitions to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-6-10)
In step S105-6-10, the main CPU 101 updates the value of the round number counter in the main RAM 103. The updating method may be increment or decrement. For example, if there are four rounds, the round number counter in the main RAM 103 may be set to "4" and decremented by one each time a round is completed, or the round number counter in the main RAM 103 may not be set to "4" and may be incremented by one each time a round is completed. Once the round number has been updated, the process proceeds to step S105-6-11.

(Step S105-6-11)
In step S105-6-11, the main CPU 101 drives the first large prize opening opening solenoid 24b to open the first large prize opening 24. In addition, the main CPU 101 sets the opening time to 29.5 seconds in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. In addition, the round designation command (opening for the second time or later) is set in the command transmission area. This starts the second round or later of the first large prize game. Then, when the first large prize opening 24 is opened, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-6-12)
In step S105-6-12, the main CPU 101 judges whether the time corresponding to the ending (for example, 14S) has elapsed. If the time corresponding to the ending has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S105-6-13, and if the time corresponding to the ending has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-6-13)
In step S105-6-13, the main CPU 101 judges whether the special symbol is either "special symbol A" or "special symbol D". In other words, the main CPU 101 judges whether the special symbol determined based on the special symbol win is either "special symbol A" or "special symbol D". If the special symbol is either "special symbol A" or "special symbol D", the process proceeds to step S105-6-14, and if the special symbol is neither "special symbol A" nor "special symbol D", the process proceeds to step S105-6-18.

(Step S105-6-14)
In step S105-6-14, the main CPU 101 sets the game state to the time-saving game state. In this process, "1" is set in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, after setting "1" in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S105-6-15.

(Step S105-6-15)
In step S105-6-15, the main CPU 101 sets the time-saving count counter to the upper limit of the time-saving count (for example, 100). Then, after setting the time-saving count counter to the upper limit of the time-saving count, the process proceeds to step S105-6-16.

(Step S105-6-16)
In step S105-6-16, the main CPU 101 sets a game state designation command (time reduction) in the command transmission area in order to transmit the game state designation command (time reduction) indicating that the game is in a time-shortened game state to the performance control board 200. Then, when the game state designation command (time reduction) is set, the process proceeds to step S105-6-17.

(Step S105-6-17)
In step S105-6-17, the main CPU 101 sets the value "0" indicating stopped in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. Note that in this process, the value "0" indicating stopped is set, but as described above, during one big win game, the special symbol is in a stopped state, so this is merely a process to set a flag to start the next fluctuation. Then, when the value "0" indicating stopped is set in the special symbol state flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-6-18)
In step S105-6-18, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state to the normal gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 101 stores "0", which indicates the normal gaming state, in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, when the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step S105-6-19.

(Step S105-6-19)
In step S105-6-19, the main CPU 101 sets the game state designation command (normal) in the command transmission area in order to transmit the game state designation command (normal) indicating that the game is in the normal game state to the performance control board 200. Then, when the game state designation command (normal) is set, the process proceeds to step S105-6-20.

(Step S105-6-20)
In step S105-6-20, the main CPU 101 sets the value "0" indicating stopped in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. Note that in this process, the value "0" indicating stopped is set, but as described above, during one big win game, the special symbol is in a stopped state, so this is merely a process to set a flag to start the next variation. Then, when the value "0" indicating stopped is set in the special symbol state flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Regarding small win game processing)
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the small win game processing carried out in the main control board 100 (a subroutine of step S105-8 of the special symbol related processing).

(Step S105-8-1)
In step S105-8-1, the main CPU 101 judges whether the opening is in progress. That is, it judges whether "0", which indicates the opening, is set in the small win status storage area of the main RAM 103. If the opening is in progress, the process proceeds to step S105-8-2. If the opening is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S105-8-5.

(Step S105-8-2)
In step S105-8-2, the main CPU 101 judges whether the time corresponding to the opening (for example, "10S") has elapsed. If the time corresponding to the opening has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S105-8-3, and if the time corresponding to the opening has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-8-3)
In step S105-8-3, the main CPU 101 drives the second large prize opening opening solenoid 32b to open the second large prize opening 32. In addition, the time management counter in the main RAM 103 is set to an opening time of 10S. This starts the first round of the small prize game. Then, when the second large prize opening 32 is opened, the process proceeds to step S105-8-4.

(Step S105-8-4)
In step S105-8-4, the main CPU 101 drives the specific area opening/closing solenoid 32d to control the lid member provided in the specific area from a closed state to an open state. The lid member is opened in conjunction with the opening of the second large prize opening 32, and the lid member is closed in conjunction with the closing of the second large prize opening 32. After controlling the opening and closing of the lid member in the specific area, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-8-5)
In step S105-8-5, the main CPU 101 determines whether the specific area passage flag is ON by referring to the specific area passage flag storage area in the main RAM 103. If the specific area passage flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S105-8-6, and if the specific area passage flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S105-8-7.

(Step S105-8-6)
In step S105-8-6, the main CPU 101 performs the second type big win transition control process. This process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 24. Then, when the second type big win transition control process is completed, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-8-7)
In step S105-8-7, the main CPU 101 judges whether the second large prize opening is being opened. That is, it judges whether "1" indicating that the second large prize opening is being opened is set in the small win status storage area of the main RAM 103. If the second large prize opening is being opened, the process proceeds to step S105-8-8. If the second large prize opening is not being opened, the process proceeds to step S105-8-11.

(Step S105-8-8)
In step S105-8-8, the main CPU 101 determines whether the second large prize opening 32 has been opened for 10 seconds, or whether the second large prize opening detection switch 32a has detected 10 balls, and thus whether either of the second large prize opening closing conditions has been met. If the second large prize opening closing condition has been met, the process proceeds to step S105-8-9, and if the second large prize opening closing condition has not been met, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-8-9)
In step S105-8-9, the main CPU 101 closes the second large prize opening 32 to end the small win game. Then, when the small win game ends, the process proceeds to step S105-8-10.

(Step S105-8-10)
In step S105-8-10, the main CPU 101 transitions to an ending that notifies the player that the small win game has ended. Also, the main CPU 101 sets a time corresponding to the ending (for example, "5S") in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. Then, when the transition to the ending has been made, the process transitions to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-8-11)
In step S105-8-11, the main CPU 101 judges whether the time corresponding to the ending (for example, "5S") has elapsed. If the time corresponding to the ending has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S105-8-12, and if the time corresponding to the ending has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-8-12)
In step S105-8-12, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state to the normal gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 101 stores "0", which indicates the normal gaming state, in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, when the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step S105-8-13.

(Step S105-8-13)
In step S105-8-13, the main CPU 101 sets a game state designation command (normal) in the command transmission area in order to transmit the game state designation command (normal) indicating that the game is in the normal game state to the performance control board 200. Then, when the game state designation command (normal) is set, the process proceeds to step S105-8-14.

(Step S105-8-14)
In step S105-8-14, the main CPU 101 sets the value "0" indicating that the reels are stopped in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, when the value "0" indicating that the reels are stopped is set in the special symbol state flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Regarding the second type jackpot transition control process)
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the second type big win transition control processing performed in the main control board 100 (a subroutine of step S105-8-6 of the small win game processing).

(Step S105-8-6-1)
In step S105-8-6-1, the main CPU 101 closes the second large prize opening 32 to end the small win game. Then, when the small win game ends, the process proceeds to step S105-8-6-2.

(Step S105-8-6-2)
In step S105-8-6-2, the main CPU 101 turns OFF the specific area passage flag in the specific area passage flag storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, after turning OFF the specific area passage flag, the process proceeds to step S105-8-6-3.

(Step S105-8-6-3)
In step S105-8-6-3, the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds (9 rounds from round 2 to round 10) in the round number counter in the main RAM 103. Then, after setting the number of rounds in the round number counter in the main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S105-8-6-4.

(Step S105-8-6-4)
In step S105-8-6-4, the main CPU 101 sets the value (4) indicating "Jackpot 2" in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, when the value (4) indicating "Jackpot 2" is set in the special symbol state flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(About the jackpot 2 game process)
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the jackpot 2 game processing carried out in the main control board 100 (a subroutine of step S105-9 of the special symbol related processing).

(Step S105-9-1)
In step S105-9-1, the main CPU 101 judges whether the start condition of the second round is satisfied. Note that a predetermined interval time (for example, "5S") is provided from the end of the small win game to the start of the big win 2 game, and when the interval time has elapsed, it is judged that the start condition of the second round is satisfied. Then, if the start condition of the second round is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S105-9-2, and if the start condition of the second round is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S105-9-3.

(Step S105-9-2)
In step S105-9-2, the main CPU 101 drives the first large prize opening opening solenoid 24b to open the first large prize opening 24. Also, the main CPU 101 sets the opening time to 29.5S in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. Also, the round designation command (here, the round designation command corresponding to the second opening) is set in the command transmission area. This starts the first round of the second large prize game (the second round if the small prize game is included). Then, when the first large prize opening 24 is opened, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-9-3)
In step S105-9-3, the main CPU 101 judges whether the first large prize opening is open. That is, it judges whether "1" indicating that the first large prize opening is open is set in the jackpot status storage area of the main RAM 103. If the first large prize opening is open, the process proceeds to step S105-9-4. If the first large prize opening is not open, the process proceeds to step S105-9-6.

(Step S105-9-4)
In step S105-9-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether either of the first large prize opening closing conditions is met, that is, whether 29.5 S has elapsed with the first large prize opening 24 open without the first large prize opening detection SW 24a detecting 10 balls entering, or whether the first large prize opening detection SW 24a has detected 10 balls entering. If the first large prize opening closing condition is met, the process proceeds to step S105-9-5, and if the first large prize opening closing condition is not met, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-9-5)
In step S105-9-5, the main CPU 101 transitions to the inter-round interval that constitutes the period from when the first large prize opening 24 is closed until the next opening. Then, when transitioning to the inter-round interval, the main control board timer interrupt process transitions to step S106.

When transitioning to the interval between rounds, the interval time is set in the counter. For special symbols F and G, this interval time is set to 0.5 seconds. In other words, for special symbols D, F, and G, 0.5 seconds is set as the interval time, so that jackpot games played during a RUSH can be played quickly. If the ball enters the first starting hole 21 during a RUSH and a special hit is made, for example, when special symbol A is determined, the interval between rounds is set to 2.5 seconds, so exceptions may occur even during a RUSH (and in situations where the RUSH continues).

(Step S105-9-6)
In step S105-9-6, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not it is during the inter-round interval. That is, it judges whether or not "2" indicating the inter-round interval is set in the jackpot status storage area of the main RAM 103. If it is during the inter-round interval, the process proceeds to step S105-9-7, and if it is not during the inter-round interval, the process proceeds to step S105-9-11.

(Step S105-9-7)
In step S105-9-7, the main CPU 101 judges whether it is the end of the final round. For example, if the result of updating the number of rounds in step S105-9-9 is that the number of remaining rounds is "0", it is judged in this process that it is the end of the final round. If it is the end of the final round, the process proceeds to step S105-9-8, and if it is not the end of the final round, the process proceeds to step S105-9-9.

(Step S105-9-8)
In step S105-9-8, the main CPU 101 transitions to an ending that notifies the player that the jackpot 2 game has ended. The main CPU 101 also sets the time corresponding to the ending of the jackpot 2 game (for example, "14S") in the time management counter of the main RAM 103, and sets an ending designation command corresponding to the special symbol in the command transmission area. Then, when the transition is made to the ending, the process transitions to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-9-9)
In step S105-9-9, the main CPU 101 updates the value of the round number counter in the main RAM 103. Then, after updating the round number, the process proceeds to step S105-9-10.

(Step S105-9-10)
In step S105-9-10, the main CPU 101 drives the first large prize opening opening solenoid 24b to open the first large prize opening 24. In addition, the main CPU 101 sets the opening time to 29.5 S in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. In addition, the round designation command (opening for the third time or later) is set in the command transmission area. This starts the third round or later of the big prize 2 game. Then, when the first large prize opening 24 is opened, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-9-11)
In step S105-9-11, the main CPU 101 judges whether the time corresponding to the ending (for example, 14S) has elapsed. If the time corresponding to the ending has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S105-9-12, and if the time corresponding to the ending has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-9-12)
In step S105-9-12, the main CPU 101 judges whether the special symbol is "special symbol F". That is, it judges whether the special symbol determined in the second large winning port detection process (FIG. 17) is "special symbol F". If the special symbol is "special symbol F", the process proceeds to step S105-9-13, and if the special symbol is not "special symbol F", the process proceeds to step S105-9-17.

(Step S105-9-13)
In step S105-9-13, the main CPU 101 sets the game state to the time-saving game state. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets "1" to the game state storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, after setting "1" to the game state storage area of the main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S105-9-14.

(Step S105-9-14)
In step S105-9-14, the main CPU 101 sets the time-saving count counter provided in the main RAM 103 to "100". This will cause a time-saving gaming state of "100" times to start from the next variation. Then, when the time-saving count counter provided in the main RAM 103 has been set to "100", the process proceeds to step S105-9-15.

(Step S105-9-15)
In step S105-9-15, the main CPU 101 sets a game state command (time reduction) in the command transmission area in order to transmit a game state designation command (time reduction) indicating that the game is in a time-shortened game state to the performance control board 200. Then, when the game state designation command (time reduction) is set, the process proceeds to step S105-9-16.

(Step S105-9-16)
In step S105-9-16, the main CPU 101 sets the value "0" indicating that the reels are stopped in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, when the value "0" indicating that the reels are stopped is set in the special symbol state flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-9-17)
In step S105-9-17, the main CPU 101 sets the game state to the normal game state. Therefore, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets "0" to the game state storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, after setting "0" to the game state storage area of the main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S105-9-18.

(Step S105-9-18)
In step S105-9-18, the main CPU 101 sets a game state designation command (normal) in the command transmission area in order to transmit the game state designation command (normal) indicating that the game is in the normal game state to the performance control board 200. Then, when the game state designation command (normal) is set, the process proceeds to step S105-9-19.

(Step S105-9-19)
In step S105-9-19, the main CPU 101 sets the value "0" indicating that the reels are stopped in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, when the value "0" indicating that the reels are stopped is set in the special symbol state flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

Next, we will explain the control processing performed by the sub-CPU 201 of the performance control board 200.

(Regarding control processing performed by sub-CPU 201)
26 to 29 are stored in the sub-ROM 202, and the sub-CPU 201 reads the control programs from the sub-ROM 202 and executes control processing according to the read control programs. First, the performance control board main processing in FIG. 26 will be described.

(Step S200)
In step S200, the sub-CPU 201 judges whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a power outage state. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a power outage state, the sub-CPU 201 repeats the process of step S200, and if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not in a power outage state, the sub-CPU 201 proceeds to step S201. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a power outage state, the sub-CPU 201 can execute the process by using a backup power source (not shown).

(Step S201)
In step S201, the sub-CPU 201 executes an initial setting process for initializing the values of internal registers, etc. During this process, an initial screen (e.g., a color bar image, etc.) is displayed on the image display device 26. This initial screen continues until a power supply related information command is received later in the main command reception process. Then, when the initial setting process ends, the process proceeds to step S202.

(Step S202)
In step S202, the sub-CPU 201 executes the setting of the CTC. That is, the setting of the CTC (counter timer circuit) having the function of generating a pulse output at a constant period and the function of measuring time is performed, and the time constant register of the CTC is set so that the performance control board timer interrupt processing described later is performed periodically every 4 ms. Then, after executing the setting of the CTC, the process proceeds to step S203.

(Step S203)
In step S203, the sub-CPU 201 inhibits the interruption of the performance control board timer interrupt process that periodically interrupts the performance control board main process and is executed. Then, when the interruption is inhibited, the process proceeds to step S204.

(Step S204)
In step S204, the sub-CPU 201 executes updating of the random numbers for effect. Then, when the updating process of the random numbers for effect is completed, the process proceeds to step S205.

(Step S205)
In step S205, the sub-CPU 201 allows the interruption of the performance control board timer interrupt process, which is executed by periodically interrupting the performance control board main process. Then, when the interruption is allowed, the process moves to step S203 again, and thereafter, steps S203 to S205 are looped.

(Regarding the performance control board timer interrupt processing)
27 is a flowchart showing the performance control board timer interruption process performed in the performance control board 200. This process is a process that is executed by periodically (for example, every 4 ms) interrupting the performance control board main process described above.

(Step S300)
In step S300, the sub CPU 201 saves the contents of the registers in a stack area. After saving the contents of the registers in the stack area, the process proceeds to step S301.

(Step S301)
In step S301, the sub-CPU 201 executes a process of updating a timer managed by the performance control board 200. Then, after updating the timer, the process proceeds to step S302.

(Step S302)
In step S302, the sub-CPU 201 executes input processing of the operation device. For example, the sub-CPU 201 executes processing according to input from the effect button detection SW 14a, the effect lever detection SW 15a, and the cross key detection SW 16a. Then, when the input processing of the operation device is completed, the process proceeds to step S303.

(Step S303)
In step S303, the sub CPU 201 executes a main command receiving process shown in Fig. 28 and Fig. 29. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 28 and Fig. 29. Then, when the main command receiving process ends, the process proceeds to step S304.

(Step S304)
In step S304, the sub-CPU 201 executes a process of transmitting a sub-command. A sub-command is a command set in the main command receiving process of Figs. 28 and 29 described later, and in this process, the sub-command is transmitted to the image and sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. Then, the image and sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c that have received the sub-command control the display, sound, light emission, and drive performances corresponding to the sub-command. Then, after transmitting the sub-command, the process proceeds to step S305.

(Step S305)
In step S305, the sub-CPU 201 executes a performance status monitoring process. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 58. Then, when the performance status monitoring process ends, the process proceeds to step S306.

(Step S306)
In step S306, the sub-CPU 201 restores the contents saved in the stack area in step S300 to the register. Then, when the contents saved in the stack area are restored to the register, the performance control board timer interrupt process is terminated.

(Regarding main command reception processing)
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing main command receiving process 1/2 performed in the performance control board 200 (a subroutine of step S303 of the performance control board timer interrupt process).

(Step S303-1)
In step S303-1, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether a power-related information command has been received. Examples of power-related information commands include the power-on command and power-restoration command described above. If a power-related information command has been received, the process proceeds to step S303-2. If a power-related information command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S303-4.

(Step S303-2)
In step S303-2, the sub-CPU 201 executes a process when a power-related information command is received. For example, if a power-on command is received, the sub-CPU 201 executes a process related to the power-on command (for example, a process for displaying a screen indicating that RAM is being cleared), and if a power restoration command is received, the sub-CPU 201 executes a process related to the power restoration command (for example, a process for displaying a screen indicating that restoration is being performed). Then, when the process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-3.

(Step S303-3)
In step S303-3, the sub-CPU 201 sets a power-related sub-command in the sub-command transmission area in order to transmit the power-related sub-command to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. Then, after completing this process, the process proceeds to step S304 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S303-4)
In step S303-4, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether an error related information command has been received. Examples of error related information commands include the above-mentioned magnetic anomaly error designation command and radio wave anomaly error designation command. If an error related information command has been received, the process proceeds to step S303-5. If an error related information command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S303-7.

(Step S303-5)
In step S303-5, the sub-CPU 201 executes a process when receiving an error-related information command. For example, if a command for specifying an error for a magnetic anomaly is received, the sub-CPU 201 executes a process for notifying a magnetic anomaly error, and if a command for specifying an error for a radio wave anomaly is received, the sub-CPU 201 executes a process for notifying a radio wave anomaly error. Then, when the process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-6.

(Step S303-6)
In step S303-6, the sub-CPU 201 sets an error-related sub-command in the sub-command transmission area in order to transmit the error-related sub-command to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. Then, when this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S304 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S303-7)
In step S303-7, the sub-CPU 201 judges whether a start port related information command has been received. Examples of start port related information commands include the first start port winning command and the special symbol storage command. If a start port related information command has been received, the process proceeds to step S303-8. If a start port related information command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S303-11.

(Step S303-8)
In step S303-8, the sub-CPU 201 executes an icon change effect determination process. Specifically, when the first start port winning designation command is received, the sub-CPU 201 refers to the information on the judgment result of the winning time judgment process included in the command, and determines the display mode of the variable icon or reserved icon (the color of the variable icon or reserved icon described in the "reserved pre-reading effect" described later). In this embodiment, since the "first memory area" to the "fourth memory area" corresponding to the second start port 22 are not provided, the reserved icon corresponding to the second start port 22 is not displayed, and the "reserved pre-reading effect" is not executed. In addition, since the variable icon is not displayed during the time-saving game state, the "reserved pre-reading effect (for the icon)" is not executed. Therefore, the icon change effect is an effect that is executed exclusively in response to the winning of the first start port 21. Then, when the process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-9.

(Step S303-9)
In step S303-9, the sub-CPU 201 executes a process for determining whether to change the start port light emitting device. The light color of the start port light emitting device is linked to the color of the reserved icon determined in step S303-8. For example, when the ball enters the start port, if it is determined in step S303-8 that the color of the reserved icon is to be blue, the start port light emitting device 21a also emits blue light. Then, when this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-10.

(Step S303-10)
In step S303-10, the sub-CPU 201 sets the start hole related sub-command in the sub-command transmission area in order to transmit the start hole related sub-command to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. Then, when this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S304 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S303-11)
In step S303-11, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether a game status related information command has been received. Examples of game status related information commands include a game status designation command (normal) and a game status designation command (time-saving). If a game status related information command has been received, the process proceeds to step S303-12. If a game status related information command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S303-14.

(Step S303-12)
In step S303-12, the sub-CPU 201 executes a process when it receives a game state related information command. For example, when it receives a game state designation command (normal), it executes a process related to the normal game state (e.g., a process to display a screen corresponding to the normal game state, etc.), and when it receives a game state designation command (time-saving), it executes a process related to the time-saving game state (e.g., a process to display a screen corresponding to the normal game state, a process to light up the right-hit indicator 29c, etc.). Then, when it finishes this process, it moves to step S303-13.

(Step S303-13)
In step S303-13, the sub-CPU 201 sets the game status related sub-command in the sub-command transmission area in order to transmit the game status related sub-command to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. Then, after completing this process, the process proceeds to step S304 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

Figure 29 is a flowchart showing main command reception process 2/2 performed on the performance control board 200 (a subroutine of step S303 of the performance control board timer interrupt process).

(Step S303-14)
In step S303-14, the sub-CPU 201 judges whether or not a performance symbol designation command has been received. If a performance symbol designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S303-15. If a performance symbol designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S303-17.

(Step S303-15)
In step S303-15, the sub-CPU 201 executes a process when receiving a performance symbol designation command. For example, when a performance symbol designation command designating special symbol A is received, a combination of symbols from "111" to "888" is determined as a decorative symbol, and when a performance symbol designation command designating special symbol B is received, a combination of symbols from "111" to "666" or "888" is determined as a decorative symbol. Then, when this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-16.

(Step S303-16)
In step S303-16, the sub-CPU 201 sets the effect pattern sub-command in the sub-command transmission area in order to transmit the effect pattern sub-command to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. Then, when this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S304 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S303-17)
In step S303-17, the sub-CPU 201 judges whether or not a small hit designation command has been received. If a small hit designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S303-18. If a small hit designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S303-20.

(Step S303-18)
In step S303-18, the sub-CPU 201 executes a process to determine a small win decorative symbol. For example, based on a predetermined distribution value, the sub-CPU 201 determines one of the symbol combinations "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", or "888". Then, when the small win decorative symbol is determined, the process proceeds to step S303-19.

(Step S303-19)
In step S303-19, the sub-CPU 201 sets the small win decoration pattern sub-command in the sub-command transmission area in order to transmit the small win decoration pattern sub-command to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. Then, after completing this process, the process proceeds to step S304 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S303-20)
In step S303-20, the sub-CPU 201 judges whether or not a special symbol variation pattern designation command has been received. If a special symbol variation pattern designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S303-21. If a special symbol variation pattern designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S303-26.

(Step S303-21)
In step S303-21, the sub-CPU 201 executes a variable performance pattern determination process. Specifically, a variable performance pattern corresponding to the designated special symbol variable pattern is determined from a variable performance pattern determination table (not shown) stored in the sub-ROM 202. In the variable performance pattern determination table, one or more variable performance patterns are associated with one special symbol variable pattern. For example, for the "normal variation" (7S) of "variation pattern 2", one corresponding variable performance pattern (7S) is prepared, and for the "super reach 1" (40S) of "variation pattern 4", multiple corresponding variable performance patterns (40S) are prepared. Then, when "variation pattern 4" is received, any one of the multiple prepared variable performance patterns is determined. Since the multiple prepared variable performance patterns each have different performance contents, multiple performances can be executed for one variable pattern. Then, when the process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-22.

(Step S303-22)
In step S303-22, the sub-CPU 201 executes an icon change effect update process. The icon change effect update process is to update the color of the icon determined in step S303-8 based on a change scenario (not shown). For example, if the change scenario is blue → yellow, it is determined in this process to change to yellow. In other words, the color of the icon may change every time one variation is played. Then, when this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-23.

(Step S303-23)
In step S303-23, the sub-CPU 201 executes a start port light-emitting device change performance update process. This process is performed in conjunction with the color updated in step S303-22. For example, if the color is updated to yellow in step S303-22, the start port light-emitting device 21a also changes from blue to yellow. Then, when this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-24.

(Step S303-24)
In step S303-24, the sub-CPU 201 executes a process for determining a big win notice effect. Specifically, the sub-CPU 201 determines a big win notice effect to be executed in the symbol variation game from a big win notice effect determination table (see Figs. 30 to 36) stored in the sub-ROM 202. Details of the notice effect will be described in Figs. 30 to 36. Then, when the process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-25.

(Step S303-25)
In step S303-25, the sub-CPU 201 sets a sub-command related to the change pattern in the sub-command transmission area in order to transmit the change pattern sub-command (for example, the information determined in steps S303-21 to S303-24) to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. Then, when this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S304 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S303-26)
In step S303-26, the sub-CPU 201 judges whether or not a special symbol determination command has been received. If the special symbol determination command has been received, the process proceeds to step S303-27. If the special symbol determination command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S303-29.

(Step S303-27)
In step S303-27, the sub-CPU 201 executes a process when a special symbol determination command is received. Specifically, the sub-CPU 201 executes a process for determining and displaying the left decorative symbol 26a, the middle decorative symbol 26b, the right decorative symbol 26c, and the fourth symbol 26d. Then, when the process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-28. In this embodiment, the left decorative symbol 26a, the middle decorative symbol 26b, and the right decorative symbol 26c may be called "decorative symbols" or "performance symbols."

(Step S303-28)
In step S303-28, the sub-CPU 201 sets the special symbol determination sub-command in the sub-command transmission area in order to transmit the special symbol determination sub-command to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. Then, when the process is completed, the process proceeds to step S304 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S303-29)
In step S303-29, the sub-CPU 201 executes processing corresponding to other received commands. For example, when a setting value changing command, a setting value checking command, or a setting value checking end command is received, the sub-CPU 201 executes processing corresponding to these received commands. Then, when the processing is completed, the process proceeds to step S304 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing.

Next, an example of the various effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is described below.

(Preview performance)
The pre-reading performance is a performance in which a pre-judgment process (for example, the winning judgment process in FIG. 15) is performed prior to the special symbol hit judgment process in the special symbol change start process at the timing when the game ball enters the first start hole 21, and the performance is executed based on the judgment result of the pre-judgment process. If the pre-reading performance is not installed, for example, when the game ball enters the first start hole 21, the judgment information (random number value) is acquired and stored, and then the special symbol hit judgment process is performed in the special symbol change start process, so even if the judgment information (random number value) is stored in the "fourth memory area", it is not judged whether or not the special symbol hit has occurred until the judgment information (random number value) is transferred to the "change memory area". Therefore, even if the judgment information (random number value) of the "special symbol hit" has been acquired, it is not possible to execute a performance that increases the expectation of the special symbol hit at a stage before the judgment information (random number value) is transferred to the "change memory area". However, if a pre-reading effect is installed, for example, a "pre-judgment process (judgment process at the time of winning)" can be performed to judge whether the "special chart is a hit" or "special chart is a miss", and then continuous performances can be executed over multiple fluctuations (including the fluctuations transferred to the variable memory area) until the judgment information (random number value) is transferred to the "variable memory area". This makes it possible to increase anticipation of a "special chart hit" from a stage before the judgment information (random number value) is transferred to the "variable memory area".

A specific example of the above-mentioned look-ahead performance is the "reserved ball look-ahead performance" (see step S303-8 in FIG. 28). The "reserved ball look-ahead performance" is a performance that mainly uses the variable icon displayed in the variable icon display area 26o and the reserved icon displayed in the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j. For example, when the judgment information (random number value) is stored up to the "third memory area", if a game ball enters the first start port 21, the judgment information (random number value) is stored in the "fourth memory area" and then a pre-judgment process is executed. Then, based on the judgment result of the pre-judgment process, if it is judged that the reserved ball look-ahead performance is to be executed, a pre-judgment reserved icon different from the default reserved icon (normal icon) of normal color (white) is displayed in the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j. The pre-reading hold icon can be displayed in multiple types and multiple stages, such as "blue", "yellow", "green", "red", and "rainbow". If the result of the pre-determination process is a "special chart hit", any of "blue", "yellow", "green", "red", and "rainbow" can be displayed. If the result of the pre-determination process is a "special chart miss", any of "blue", "yellow", "green", and "red" can be displayed. Then, "rainbow" can be selected only in the case of a "special chart hit", and "red" is made easy to select in the case of a "special chart hit", and "blue" is made easy to select in the case of a "special chart miss", thereby increasing the expectation of a "red" special chart hit. The relationship of the expectation of a special chart hit is, in order of the expectation of a special chart hit, rainbow > red > green > yellow > blue > normal. In this embodiment, such a performance is sometimes called a "hold change performance".

A specific example of another example of the above-mentioned pre-reading effect is the "win-time flash effect". The "win-time flash effect" is an effect in which, when a game ball enters the starting hole, the speaker lamp provided on the lower speaker 10 lights up, and continues to light up until the pattern change game related to the ball entering starts, or until the pattern change game related to the ball entering is being played, or until the pattern change game related to the ball entering ends, thereby increasing the expectation of a special winning. For example, when the judgment information (random number value) is stored up to the "third memory area", if a game ball enters the first starting hole 21, the judgment information (random number value) is stored in the "fourth memory area" and then a pre-judgment process is executed. Then, if it is determined based on the judgment result of the pre-judgment process that a win-time flash effect is to be executed, a scenario (a scenario with a predetermined light color) for illuminating the speaker lamp is selected, and the speaker lamp is illuminated based on the selected scenario. The speaker lamp's light colors are, for example, red > green > blue, in descending order of the expectation of a special winning symbol. As with the reserved pre-reading performance described above, it is also possible to change the color to one that indicates a high expectation of a special winning symbol for each pattern-changing game. It is also possible to output winning sounds corresponding to each color.

A specific example of another type of the above-mentioned look-ahead performance is a "zone performance." The "zone performance" is a performance that mainly uses the image display device 26. For example, when the judgment information (random number value) is stored up to the "third memory area," if a game ball enters the first starting hole 21, the judgment information (random number value) is stored in the "fourth memory area," and then a pre-judgment process is executed. Then, if it is determined that a zone performance is to be executed based on the judgment result of the pre-judgment process, for example, in the next pattern change game, the image display device 26 performs a performance encouraging the player to enter, such as "Enter the XX zone when the special patterns are lined up!", and then the special patterns are lined up to enter the "XX zone," and the "XX zone" performance is executed until the judgment information (random number value) stored in the "fourth memory area" is transferred to the "change memory area." During the execution of this "XX zone" performance, the image display device 26 displays a caption such as "In the XX zone." Furthermore, the "zone effect" is more likely to be executed if the pre-determination process determines that there is a "special chart win" and less likely to be executed if there is a "special chart miss," so if it is executed, there can be high hopes that a special chart win will be awarded.

A specific example of another effect of the above-mentioned look-ahead effect is the "Chance Eyes Continuous Notice". The "Chance Eyes Continuous Notice" is an effect that mainly uses the left decorative pattern image 26a, the middle decorative pattern image 26b, and the right decorative pattern image 26c displayed on the image display device 26. For example, when the judgment information (random number value) is stored up to the "third memory area", if a game ball enters the first starting hole 21, the judgment information (random number value) is stored in the "fourth memory area" and then a pre-judgment process is executed. Then, when it is judged based on the judgment result of the pre-judgment process that the chance eye continuous effect is to be executed, for example, the combination of the decorative pattern images of the same color is stopped in the confirmation display of the pattern change game corresponding to the judgment information (random number value) stored in the "first memory area", the confirmation display of the pattern change game corresponding to the judgment information (random number value) stored in the "second memory area", and the confirmation display of the pattern change game corresponding to the judgment information (random number value) stored in the "third memory area". For example, the decorative pattern image is composed of "333" and "777" in red, "111" and "555" in green, and "222", "444", "666", and "888" in blue. By displaying combinations of only red, such as "337" and "773", combinations of only green, such as "115" and "551", and combinations of only blue, such as "246" and "628", over multiple variations, it creates an expectation that a special winning pattern will be awarded in the subsequent pattern variation game. In the case of a special winning pattern, it is easy to select a combination of only red, and in the case of a special losing pattern, it is easy to select a combination of only blue, increasing the expectation of a special winning pattern when a combination of only red is displayed.

(Pseudo consecutive announcement)
The pseudo consecutive prediction is a performance that mainly uses the left decorative pattern 26a, the middle decorative pattern 26b, the right decorative pattern 26c, and the pseudo consecutive exclusive pattern displayed on the image display device 26, and is a performance that makes it look as if multiple variations are occurring by repeatedly displaying the temporary stop of the decorative pattern in a "one variation game" (corresponding to variation patterns 6 to 8 and variation patterns 12 to 14). For example, as shown in FIG. 7, the pseudo consecutive can be performed two or three times, and the more times it is performed, the higher the expectation of a special winning pattern. As a specific performance content, for example, "5" is temporarily displayed as the left decorative pattern 26a, "6" is temporarily displayed as the right decorative pattern 26c, and "pseudo consecutive exclusive pattern" is temporarily displayed as the center decorative pattern 26b, and all decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner again (at this point, pseudo consecutive is displayed twice), and again, "5" is temporarily displayed as the left decorative pattern 26a, "6" is temporarily displayed as the right decorative pattern 26c, and "pseudo consecutive exclusive pattern" is temporarily displayed as the center decorative pattern 26b. Then, all the decorative symbols are displayed again (at this point, three pseudo consecutive times). For example, if "5" is displayed as the left decorative symbol 26a and "5" is displayed as the right decorative symbol 26c in the second provisional stop display, this is two pseudo consecutive times, and if "5" is displayed as the left decorative symbol 26a and "6" is displayed as the right decorative symbol 26c in the second provisional stop display, this is three pseudo consecutive times. Also, once a reach is reached, a so-called "pseudo consecutive after reach" is displayed as the "pseudo consecutive exclusive symbol" in the middle decorative symbol 26b, or, for example, at the start of the change after the first provisional stop display, a notice (symbol stop notice) that the "pseudo consecutive exclusive symbol" will be displayed as the middle decorative symbol 26b is displayed as a provisional stop, and three or more pseudo consecutive times are confirmed at that point.

Next, the big win notice performance will be explained. The big win notice performance (performance suggesting the possibility of a big win game being executed) is a performance determined in step S303-24 of FIG. 29. For example, when a game ball is placed in the second start hole 22 in the time-saving game state, a variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second is executed in all cases of a special win, a special miss, and a small win (see FIG. 7). Therefore, when a game ball is placed in the second start hole 22 in the time-saving game state, a big win notice performance is not executed. The big win notice performance referred to here is a performance that is executed mainly when a game ball is placed in the first start hole 21 in the normal game state.

In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 22 during time-saving play, a big win preview performance may be executed. However, since the fluctuation time is one second, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 22, a preview performance using voice or sound effects may be executed from the speaker 10. For example, if a special pattern F is determined based on the ball entering, a special sound may be output. This makes it possible to derive a judgment result in a short time while preventing the performance from becoming monotonous.

FIG. 30 shows a notice determination table 1, which is a table for determining a notice (pre-reach notice) that is executed from the start of the change to before a reach is formed in a pattern change game.
The table is stored in the sub-ROM 202, and determines the results of the special pattern hit determination process, the variable presentation pattern, the distribution, and the notice (contents). The sub-CPU 201 refers to the results of the special pattern hit determination process and the determined variable presentation pattern, and determines the notice (contents) using the extracted random number value for determining the notice.

If the judgment result is a special miss, if the change presentation pattern is a shortened change, no notice will always be determined, if the change presentation pattern is a normal change, there is an 80% chance that no notice will be determined and a 20% chance that a dialogue notice will be determined, and if the change presentation pattern is a normal reach, there is a 70% chance that no notice will be determined and a 30% chance that a dialogue notice will be determined.
In addition, if the change presentation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 20% chance that there will be no notice, a 70% chance that there will be a dialogue notice, and a 10% chance that there will be a button vibration notice; and if the change presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is an 80% chance that there will be a dialogue notice, and a 20% chance that there will be a button vibration notice.

When the judgment result is a special hit, if the variable presentation pattern is normal reach, there is a 30% chance that there will be no notice, and a 70% chance that there will be a dialogue notice, and if the variable presentation pattern is super reach 1, there is a 20% chance that there will be no notice, a 60% chance that there will be a dialogue notice, and a 20% chance that there will be a button vibration notice.
In addition, if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 70% chance that a dialogue preview will be displayed and a 30% chance that a button vibration preview will be displayed; if the variable presentation pattern is Full Rotation Reach, there is a 60% chance that a dialogue preview will be displayed and a 40% chance that a button vibration preview will be displayed.

The advance notice determination table 1 has the following characteristics.
The line announcement can be executed even when no reach is achieved, which can eliminate boredom and prevent a decline in interest in the game.
Even if a super reach (special chart miss, special chart hit) is executed, no notice may be selected. This prevents you from being disappointed because the pre-reach notice was not executed.
When a super reach (a special miss or a special win) is executed, the pre-reach notice is more likely to be executed than when a shortened variation or a normal variation is executed. This allows the player to pay attention to the subsequent developments when the pre-reach notice is executed, and increases the interest in the game.
The button vibration notice can be executed in the super reach or higher (super reach 1, 2, full spin). This allows the player to know in advance that the super reach or higher (super reach 1, 2, full spin) will be executed due to the occurrence of the button vibration notice, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, in Super Reach 1, when the special chart is missed, the dialogue announcement is more likely to be executed and the button vibration announcement is less likely to be executed compared to when the special chart is hit.
For example, in Super Reach 2, when the special chart is missed, the dialogue announcement is more likely to be executed and the button vibration announcement is less likely to be executed compared to when the special chart is hit.
This makes it possible to increase the player's expectations of hitting the special symbol when the button vibration prediction is executed, and allows the player to play while hoping that the button vibration prediction will be executed.

Figure 31 is a dialogue preview decision table for determining the details of the dialogue preview. The basic decision method is the same as in Figure 30.

If the judgment result is a special chart miss, if the change presentation pattern is a normal change, the dialogue (white) will always be determined, if the change presentation pattern is a normal reach, the dialogue (white) will be determined 90% of the time and the dialogue (red) will be determined 10% of the time, if the change presentation pattern is a super reach 1, the dialogue (white) will be determined 20% of the time and the dialogue (red) will be determined 50% of the time, and two stages of dialogue (red) will be determined 30% of the time.
If the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 20% chance that a line (white) will be displayed, a 40% chance that a line (red) will be displayed, and a 40% chance that two stages of line (red) will be displayed.

If the judgment result is a special hit, if the variable presentation pattern is normal reach, there is a 50% chance that the dialogue (white) will be determined, and a 50% chance that the dialogue (red) will be determined. If the variable presentation pattern is super reach 1, there is a 10% chance that the dialogue (white) will be determined, a 40% chance that the dialogue (red) will be determined, and a 50% chance that two stages of dialogue (red) will be determined.
If the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 10% chance that a line (white) will be displayed, a 30% chance that a line (red) will be displayed, and a 60% chance that two stages of line (red) will be displayed. If the variable presentation pattern is Full Rotation Reach, there is a 40% chance that two stages of line (red) will be displayed, and a 60% chance that a line (rainbow) will be displayed.

The dialogue preview decision table has the following features:
For example, in a normal reach, when the special chart is missed, the lines (white) are more likely to be executed and the lines (red) are less likely to be executed compared to when the special chart is hit.
For example, in Super Reach 1, when the special chart is missed, the dialogue (white) and the dialogue (red) are more likely to be executed, and the dialogue (red) in two stages is less likely to be executed, compared to when the special chart is hit.
For example, in Super Reach 2, when the special chart is missed, the dialogue (white) and the dialogue (red) are more likely to be executed, and the dialogue (red) in two stages is less likely to be executed, compared to when the special chart is hit.
This allows the player to play the game while hoping for two stages of dialogue (red) to be executed, one more dialogue (red).

The white selif can be executed even at super reach or higher (except full rotation reach). This prevents you from being disappointed when the white selif appears.
The red line can be executed when the player is in reach or higher (normal reach, super reach 1, 2). This allows the player to know in advance that the red line will cause the player to be in reach or higher (normal reach, super reach 1, 2), thereby improving the player's interest in the game.
The two-stage red dialogue can be executed in the Super Reach or higher (Super Reach 1, 2, full spin). This allows the player to know in advance that the Super Reach or higher (Super Reach 1, 2, full spin) will be executed when the two-stage red dialogue occurs, which can increase the player's interest in the game.
The serif (rainbow) can only be executed in the full rotation reach. This allows the serif (rainbow) to be linked to the full rotation reach, and allows the player to know in advance that the full rotation reach will be executed.

Figure 32 is a button vibration notification determination table for determining the details of the button vibration notification. The basic determination method is the same as that shown in Figure 30.

If the result of the judgment is a special miss, if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 90% chance that 1 vibration will occur for 2 seconds, and a 10% chance that 3 vibrations will occur for 2 seconds. If the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is an 80% chance that 1 vibration will occur for 2 seconds, and a 20% chance that 3 vibrations will occur for 2 seconds.

If the result of the judgment is a special hit, if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 70% chance that 1 vibration will occur for 2 seconds, and a 30% chance that 3 vibrations will occur for 2 seconds. If the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 60% chance that 1 vibration will occur for 2 seconds, and a 40% chance that 3 vibrations will occur for 2 seconds. If the variable presentation pattern is a full rotation reach, there is a 30% chance that 1 vibration will occur for 2 seconds, and a 70% chance that 3 vibrations will occur for 2 seconds.

The button vibration notification determination table has the following characteristics:
For example, in Super Reach 1, if the special chart is missed, it is more likely that 1 vibration per 2 seconds will be determined, and it is more difficult to determine 3 vibrations per 2 seconds, compared to when the special chart is hit.
For example, in Super Reach 2, if the special chart is missed, it is more likely that 1 vibration per 2 seconds will be determined, and it is more difficult to determine 3 vibrations per 2 seconds, compared to when the special chart is hit.
This allows the player to play the game while hoping for the two-second vibration to be executed three times.

In a full rotation reach, the probability of 3 x 2-second vibrations being determined is higher than the probability of 1 x 2-second vibration being determined. This makes it possible to instantly raise the player's expectations when 3 x 2-second vibrations are executed, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

Note that since the dialogue preview is a preview executed by the image display device 26 and the button vibration preview is a preview executed by the effect button 14, the two may be executed simultaneously in a combined form. This can instantly raise the player's expectations and improve the player's interest in the game.

Here, the modes of the dialogue preview and button vibration preview will be described with reference to Figures 37 and 38.
FIG. 37 shows an aspect of the dialogue preview.
(a1) is a scene where an image imitating the effect button 14 (a button image labeled PUSH) is displayed in the center of the image display device 26 during the variable display of each of the decorative symbols 26a to 26c and the fourth symbol 26d. The image imitating the effect button 14 is displayed entirely in green, and the effect button LED also emits a corresponding green light, notifying the player that the effect button 14 is in an effective operation time. This prompts the player to operate the effect button 14. The button image is displayed in the same display size (dimension) for the dialogue preview, cut-in preview, and judgement.

When the player operates the effect button 14, a character and a line are displayed as shown in (a2). (a2) shows the form of the line (white), and while the decorative patterns 26a to 26c and the fourth pattern 26d are being displayed in a variable manner, the character issues a line image SE1 saying "Maybe we're in the winning position!?". The line (white) is indicated by a white background color in the speech bubble of the line image SE1, and the text portion is, for example, black. Also, line sound effect 1 is output along with the display of the line image SE1, which also audibly indicates that the line (white) has been displayed.

When the dialogue image SE1 is displayed for a predetermined time (e.g., 2.5 seconds), the dialogue image SE1 becomes invisible as shown in (a3), and then a reach may be formed as shown in (a4).

(b1) is a scene in which a button image (labeled PUSH) that resembles the effect button 14 is displayed in the center of the image display device 26 while the decorative patterns 26a-26c and the fourth pattern 26d are being displayed in a variable manner. The button image is displayed entirely in green, and the effect button LED also emits a corresponding green light, indicating that the effect button 14 is in its valid operation time. This prompts the player to operate the effect button 14. In addition, a button display sound (single tone) indicating that the button image has been displayed is output from the speaker 10 in conjunction with the display of the button image.

When the player operates the effect button 14, a character and a line are displayed as shown in (b2). (b2) shows the form of the line (red), and while each of the decorative patterns 26a to 26c and the fourth pattern 26d are being displayed in a variable manner, a line image SE2 saying "Chance!" is spoken by the character. The line (red) refers to the background color of the speech bubble of the line image SE2 being red, and the text portion being, for example, black. In addition, a line sound effect 2 is output along with the display of the line image SE2, which also audibly indicates that the line (red) has been displayed.

In the case of dialogue (red), the dialogue image SE2 becomes invisible after a predetermined time (e.g., 2.5 seconds) has elapsed, but when two stages of dialogue (red) are performed, the state shown in (b3) is reached, and the dialogue image SE2 that started to be displayed in (b2) remains displayed even after a predetermined time (e.g., 2.5 seconds) has elapsed, and then a dialogue image SE3 is uttered by another character saying "Hot!" In the dialogue image SE3, the background color in the speech bubble is also red, and the text portion is, for example, black. Furthermore, dialogue sound effect 2 is output together with the display of the dialogue image SE3, further audibly indicating that the dialogue (red) has been displayed.

Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the display of dialogue image SE3, dialogue image SE2 and dialogue image SE3 are hidden, and then a reach like that shown in (b4) is formed. In other words, if it is dialogue (red), the execution period is 2.5 seconds, and if it is dialogue (red) 2 stages, the execution period is 5.5 seconds.

In this way, dialogue (white) and dialogue (red) are displayed in a visually clearly different manner, and dialogue (red) and two-stage dialogue (red) are displayed in a visually clearly different manner, preventing the user from being confused as to which dialogue preview has been executed.

In addition, since the dialogue sound effect 1 is output together with the display of the dialogue (white) and the dialogue sound effect 2 is output together with the display of the dialogue (red), it is possible to prevent the situation where it is difficult to understand which dialogue advance notice has been executed even through the auditory sense.
In addition, since dialogue sound effect 1 corresponds to dialogue (white) and dialogue sound effect 2 corresponds to dialogue (red), it can be said that the dialogue sound effect output at the same time as the dialogue preview also indicates the degree of expectation for a special prize.

In addition, by having the display color of the button image correspond to the light color of the effect button LED, it is easy to know when the effect button 14 is in a valid operation period.

In the case of serifs (white), the background color is white and the characters are black, but the background color may be black and the characters may be white.
In other words, using a normal color means using "white" for either the background color or the characters.
Also, for serifs (red), the background color is red and the characters are black, but the background color may be black and the characters may be red.
In other words, the use of a specific color means using "red" for either the background color or the characters.
Additionally, the text of the dialogue may be abstract (e.g., maybe it's a reach!?) or concrete (e.g., it's a reach!).

FIG. 38 shows an example of a button vibration warning.
(a1) is a scene in which the decorative symbols 26a to 26c and the fourth symbol 26d start to change, and the effect button 14 is not vibrating. At this time, the effect button LED is emitting white light.
(a2) is a scene a predetermined time after (a1), for example, 1 second, and in this scene, the effect button 14 vibrates once for 2 seconds. At this time, the effect button LED also emits white light.
(b1) is the same scene as (a1), and (b2) is a scene a predetermined time has passed since (b1) (e.g., 1 second), in which the effect button 14 vibrates once for 2 seconds, then after a 0.5 second interval, the effect button 14 vibrates once for 2 seconds, then after a 0.5 second interval, the effect button 14 vibrates once for 2 seconds. The light emission mode of the effect button LED is the same as (a1) and (a2).
That is, (a1) and (a2) are modes of vibration for 2 seconds x 1 time, and (b1) and (b2) are modes of vibration for 2 seconds x 3 times.
In this way, since the vibrations are performed in clearly different manners, it is possible to prevent the user from being confused as to which button vibration notification has been executed.

Note that the button vibration notification differs in the number of vibrations, such as 1 x 2-second vibration or 3 x 2-second vibration, but it may also differ in the duration of the vibration. For example, there may be a 2-second vibration and a 5-second vibration, and the 5-second vibration may be less likely to be selected in the event of a loss than the 2-second vibration, but more likely to be selected in the event of a win.

33 is a notice determination table 2, which is a table for determining a notice (a notice during a reach) to be executed when a reach is formed in a symbol variation game. The time when a reach is formed is intended to be a time when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the left decorative pattern 26a and the right decorative pattern 26c are temporarily stopped (for example, 4↓4).
The table is stored in the sub-ROM 202, and determines the results of the special pattern hit determination process, the variable presentation pattern, the distribution, and the notice (contents). The sub-CPU 201 refers to the results of the special pattern hit determination process and the determined variable presentation pattern, and determines the notice (contents) using the extracted random number value for determining the notice.

If the judgment result is a special miss, if the change presentation pattern is a shortened change, no notice will always be determined, if the change presentation pattern is a normal change, no notice will always be determined, and if the change presentation pattern is a normal reach, no notice will always be determined.
In addition, if the change presentation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 30% chance that no notice will be determined, a 60% chance that a logo notice will be determined, and a horde of cars notice will be determined, and if the change presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 35% chance that no notice will be determined, a 60% chance that a logo notice will be determined, and a horde of cars notice will be determined, and

When the judgment result is a special winning pattern, if the variable presentation pattern is normal reach, no warning will always be determined, and if the variable presentation pattern is super reach 1, there is a 10% chance that no warning will be determined, a 40% chance that a logo warning will be determined, and a 60% chance that a group of cars will be determined.
In addition, if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 10% chance that there will be no notice, a 55% chance that there will be a logo notice, and a 35% chance that there will be a car horde notice; and if the variable presentation pattern is a full rotation reach, there is a 40% chance that there will be a logo notice, and a 60% chance that there will be a car horde notice.

The advance notice determination table 2 has the following characteristics.
Both the logo notice and the car group notice can be executed in super reach or higher (super reach 1, 2, full rotation), but are not executed in normal reach. This allows the player to play while hoping that the logo notice or the car group notice will be executed when a reach is formed.
For example, in Super Reach 1, when the special chart is missed, no notice or logo notice is more likely to be executed, and car group notice is more likely to be executed, compared to when the special chart is hit.
For example, in Super Reach 2, when the special chart is missed, no notice or logo notice is more likely to be executed, and car group notice is more likely to be executed, compared to when the special chart is won.
This makes it possible to increase the player's expectations for hitting the special chart when the car crowd prediction is executed, and allows the player to play the game while hoping that the car crowd prediction will be executed.

Figure 34(a) is a logo preview determination table for determining the details of the logo preview, and Figure 34(b) is a car group preview determination table for determining the details of the car group preview. The basic determination method is the same as in Figure 30.

The logo preview determination table states that if the result of the determination is a miss on the special chart, if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 90% chance that it will be a chance and a 10% chance that it will be a super hot one, and if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is an 85% chance that it will be a chance and a 15% chance that it will be a super hot one.

If the result of the judgment is a special hit, if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 70% chance that it will be a chance and a 30% chance that it will be a super hot one, if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 60% chance that it will be a chance and a 40% chance that it will be a super hot one, and if the variable presentation pattern is a full rotation reach, there is a 50% chance that it will be a chance and a 50% chance that it will be a super hot one.

The logo preview decision table has the following features:
For example, in Super Reach 1, if the special chart is missed, the chance is more likely to be executed and the super heat is less likely to be executed compared to if the special chart is hit.
For example, in Super Reach 2, if the special chart is missed, chance is more likely to be executed and super heat is less likely to be executed compared to when the special chart is hit.
This allows the player to play the game while hoping for the super-hot action to be executed.

When comparing Super Reach 1 and Super Reach 2, Chance is more likely to occur with Super Reach 1, while Super Reach 2 is more likely to occur with Super Heat. This makes it easier to predict which Super Reach will occur later based on which logo announcement is executed.

The car group prediction determination table is that if the result of the judgment is a special chart miss, if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 1, the first car group will be determined with an 80% chance, and the second car group with a 20% chance, and if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, the first car group will be determined with a 70% chance, and the second car group with a 30% chance.

If the result of the judgment is a special hit, if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 1, the first group of cars will be determined with a 60% chance, and the second group of cars with a 40% chance, if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, the first group of cars will be determined with a 50% chance, and the second group of cars with a 50% chance, and if the variable presentation pattern is Full Rotation Reach, the first group of cars will be determined with a 40% chance, and the second group of cars with a 60% chance.

The vehicle group prediction decision table has the following features:
For example, in Super Reach 1, when the special chart is missed, the first car group is more likely to be executed and the second car group is less likely to be executed than when the special chart is hit.
For example, in Super Reach 2, when the special chart is missed, the first group of cars is more likely to be executed and the second group of cars is less likely to be executed than when the special chart is hit.
This allows the player to play the game while hoping for the second car group to be executed.

When comparing Super Reach 1 and Super Reach 2, the first car group is more likely to have Super Reach 1, while the second car group is more likely to have Super Reach 2. This makes it easier to predict which Super Reach will be executed later based on which car group announcement is executed.

In a full rotation reach, the second group of cars is more likely to be executed than the first group of cars. This means that when the second group of cars is executed, the player's expectations for a special win can be instantly increased.

Here, the aspects of the logo preview and car group preview will be explained using Figures 39 and 40.
FIG. 39 shows an aspect of the logo preview.
(a1) is a scene in which the decorative symbols 26a to 26c and the fourth symbol 26d are being displayed in a variable manner, and (a2) is a scene in which the left decorative symbol 26a and the right decorative symbol 26c are temporarily displayed with "4" and a reach is formed. The logo notice is displayed above the decorative symbols 26a to 26c as soon as a reach is formed. For example, in (a2), a logo image log1 with the word "chance" written on it is displayed. This logo image log1 is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) and then becomes invisible, after which a super reach 1 or the like can be executed.

(b1) is the same as (a1), and in (b2), a logo image log2 with the words "super hot" written on it is displayed. This logo image log2 is displayed for a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds) and then becomes invisible, after which Super Reach 1 and the like can be executed.

In this way, Chance and Extreme Heat are displayed in a visually distinctly different manner, which prevents the player from having difficulty understanding which logo announcement has been executed.

In addition, since the expectation of winning the special chart is higher for "super hot" than for "chance," for example, "chance" may be displayed in green and "super hot" in red. This allows the color as well as the text to suggest that the expectation is high.

In addition, the speaker 10 may output the sound "Chance" in conjunction with the display of Chance, or the speaker 10 may output the sound "Super Hot" in conjunction with the display of Super Hot. This makes it possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a special winning symbol not only visually but also aurally, thereby increasing interest in the game.

FIG. 40 shows an example of vehicle group advance notice.
(a1) and (b1) are scenes in which the decorative symbols 26a to 26c and the fourth symbol 26d are variably displayed, and (a2) and (b2) are scenes in which the left decorative symbol 26a and the right decorative symbol 26c temporarily display "4" and a reach is formed. The car group preview is different from the logo preview in that an image resembling a plurality of cars moves from the right end to the left end of the image display device 26 a predetermined time (e.g., 1.5 seconds) after the reach is formed.

(a3) shows the display mode of the first car group, where multiple car group images car1 that make up the first car group are displayed. Also, (b3) shows the display mode of the second car group, where multiple car group images car2 that make up the second car group are displayed. In either case, it takes about 2 seconds from the start to the end of the display of the car group images, and once the display of the car group images has ended, Super Reach 1 and the like can then be executed.

In this way, the first vehicle group and the second vehicle group are displayed in a visually clearly different manner, which prevents the driver from having difficulty understanding which vehicle group announcement has been made.

Note that both the logo preview and the car group preview may be determined in one variable performance, or only one of them may be determined.

FIG. 35(a) is a notice determination table 3, which is a table for determining a notice to be executed during a super reach (super reach notice) in a pattern change game.
The table is stored in the sub-ROM 202, and determines the results of the special pattern hit determination process, the variable presentation pattern, the distribution, and the notice (contents). The sub-CPU 201 refers to the results of the special pattern hit determination process and the determined variable presentation pattern, and determines the notice (contents) using the extracted random number value for determining the notice.

If the result of the judgment is a special chart miss, if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is an 80% chance that conversation (white) will be determined, and a 20% chance that conversation (red) will be determined. If the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 90% chance that conversation (white) will be determined, and a 10% chance that conversation (red) will be determined.

If the result of the judgment is a special hit, if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 60% chance that conversation (white) will be determined, and a 40% chance that conversation (red) will be determined. If the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 50% chance that conversation (white) will be determined, and a 50% chance that conversation (red) will be determined.

The advance notice determination table 3 has the following characteristics.
For example, in Super Reach 1, when the special chart is missed, conversation (white) is more likely to be executed and conversation (red) is more difficult to execute than when the special chart is hit.
For example, in Super Reach 2, when the special chart is missed, conversation (white) is more likely to be executed and conversation (red) is more difficult to execute than when the special chart is hit.
This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation of hitting the special chart when the conversation (red) is executed, and allows the player to play the game while hoping that the conversation (red) will be executed.

Figure 35(b) shows the notice determination table 4, which is a table for determining the notice to be executed during a super reach (super reach notice) in a symbol change game. The basic determination method is the same as that shown in Figure 35(a).

If the result of the judgment is a special chart miss, if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 90% chance that a cut-in (green) will occur, and a 10% chance that a cut-in (red) will occur. If the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 90% chance that a cut-in (green) will occur, and a 10% chance that a cut-in (red) will occur.

If the result of the judgment is a special hit, if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 70% chance that a cut-in (green) will occur, and a 30% chance that a cut-in (red) will occur. If the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 60% chance that a cut-in (green) will occur, and a 40% chance that a cut-in (red) will occur.

The advance notice determination table 4 has the following characteristics.
For example, in Super Reach 1, when the special chart is missed, a cut-in (green) is more likely to be executed and a cut-in (red) is less likely to be executed compared to when the special chart is hit.
For example, in Super Reach 2, when the special chart is missed, a cut-in (green) is more likely to be executed and a cut-in (red) is less likely to be executed compared to when the special chart is hit.
This allows the player to increase his/her expectations for a special winning pattern when the cut-in (red) is executed, and allows the player to play while hoping for the cut-in (red) to be executed. Note that the game may also include a cut-in (rainbow) that can be executed only when the special pattern is won and definitely notifies the player that a big win game will be obtained.

Figure 36 (c) shows the notice determination table 5, which is a table for determining the notice (judgment effect) to be executed during a super reach in a symbol change game. The basic determination method is the same as that shown in Figure 35 (a).

The judgement effect is an effect that is performed at the timing to notify the result of the special symbol hit judgment process during a super reach, and notifies the player whether the judgment result is a special symbol hit or a special symbol miss by having the player operate the effect button 14 or effect lever 15 (or, if no operation is performed, the valid operation time passes). Since the button image bg that imitates the effect button 14 and the effect lever image leg that imitates the effect lever 15 are displayed immediately before the judgment result is announced, the display of these images alone is considered a notice, and the series of effects from the display of these images to the announcement of the judgment result is the judgement effect. Note that, below, it may be simply referred to as "judge".

If the result of the judgment is a special miss, if the variable performance pattern is Super Reach 1, there is an 80% chance that the performance button will be selected and a 20% chance that the performance lever will be selected, and if the variable performance pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 90% chance that the performance button will be selected and a 10% chance that the performance lever will be selected.

If the result of the judgment is a special hit, if the variable performance pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 60% chance that the performance button will be selected and a 40% chance that the performance lever will be selected, and if the variable performance pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 50% chance that the performance button will be selected and a 50% chance that the performance lever will be selected.

Figure 36 (d) is a performance button determination table for judge performance, which is a table for determining the display color of the button image and the light color of the performance button LED when a performance button is determined in advance determination table 5.

If the result of the judgment is a special miss, if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 90% chance that the presentation button (normal) will be determined, and a 10% chance that the presentation button (red) will be determined, and if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 95% chance that the presentation button (normal) will be determined, and a 5% chance that the presentation button (red) will be determined. Note that the presentation button (normal) is a presentation mode in which the display color of the button image and the light color of the presentation button LED are green, and the presentation button (red) is a presentation mode in which the display color of the button image and the light color of the presentation button LED are red.

If the result of the judgment is a special hit, if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 45% chance that the presentation button (normal) will be determined, and a 55% chance that the presentation button (red) will be determined, and if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 40% chance that the presentation button (normal) will be determined, and a 60% chance that the presentation button (red) will be determined.

The advance notice determination table 5 and the effect button determination table have the following characteristics.
For example, in Super Reach 1, when the special chart is missed, the effect button is more likely to be executed and the effect lever is more difficult to execute than when the special chart is won.
For example, in Super Reach 2, when the special chart is missed, the effect button is more likely to be executed and the effect lever is more difficult to execute than when the special chart is won.
This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation of a special winning symbol when the effect lever is operated, and allows the player to play the game while hoping that the effect lever will be operated.

For example, in Super Reach 1, when the special chart is missed, the effect button (normal) is more likely to be executed and the effect button (red) is more difficult to execute than when the special chart is won.
For example, in Super Reach 2, when the special chart is missed, the effect button (normal) is more likely to be executed and the effect button (red) is more difficult to execute than when the special chart is won.
As a result, even if the judgement effect is the effect button, if the effect button (red) is executed, the player's expectation of a special winning pattern can be increased, and the player can play the game while hoping that the effect button (red) will be executed.

The judgement effect of operating the effect button 14 or effect lever 15 may be performed in either Super Reach 1 or Super Reach 2, or in only one of them. If it is performed in only one of them, the other may be set to announce the judgment result without any operation.

In addition, for judge performance, either the performance button (normal) or the performance button (red) can be executed, and for dialogue previews and cut-in previews, only the performance button (normal) can be executed, but the performance button (red) may also be executed for dialogue previews and cut-in previews.

FIG. 41 shows an example of a cut-in preview.
(a1) and (b1) show a scene in which a transition has been made to a super reach (for example, super reach 1), and each of the decorative patterns 26a to 26c has moved to the upper right of the display area and is displayed in a reduced size.

(a2) and (b2) are scenes where a predetermined time has passed since transitioning to a super reach (e.g., super reach 1), and where a button image (an image labeled PUSH) is displayed in the center of the image display device 26. The button image is displayed entirely in green, and the effect button LED also emits the corresponding green light, notifying that the effect button 14 is in its valid operation time. In the cut-in preview, a button image bg that imitates the effect button 14 is displayed, and no image saying "Press!" or sound saying "Press" is output. Instead, the speaker 10 outputs a button display sound (single sound) that indicates that the button image has been displayed in conjunction with the display of the button image. This button display sound is the same as the sound output during the dialogue preview.

(a3) shows the display mode of a cut-in (green), with cut-in image ci1 with "chance" written in green being displayed. Also, (b3) shows the display mode of a cut-in (red), with cut-in image ci2 with "chance" written in red being displayed. In either case, it takes about 3 seconds from the start to the end of the cut-in image display, and shortly after the cut-in image display ends, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is announced. In other words, the cut-in announcement is a preview performance that is executed just before the result of the judgment is announced.

In this way, the cut-in notice (green) and the cut-in notice (red) are displayed in a visually clearly different manner, which prevents the viewer from having difficulty understanding which cut-in notice has been executed.

FIG. 42 shows an aspect of the judge presentation.
(a1) and (b1) are scenes of a conversation preview during a super reach (e.g., super reach 2), in which an enemy character chaB is displayed, and a conversation image con4-1 such as "Let's go" is displayed in "white" text. Also, a voice such as "Let's go" is output from the speaker 10.

The conversation preview is a preview that is executed during the performance in which friendly character chaA and enemy character chaB face off against each other. A conversation between friendly character chaA and enemy character chaB is executed in the lower center of the display area, and the text color (e.g., white text, red text) of the conversation image con4-1 is a preview that suggests the possibility of a winning game being executed.

(a2) and (b2) are scenes in which the result of the special symbol hit determination process is announced. In (a2), a button image (an image labeled PUSH) is displayed in the center of the image display device 26, and here, the button image is displayed entirely in red. In addition, the effect button LED is illuminated in the corresponding red color, encouraging the operation of the effect button 14. Meanwhile, in (b2), an image modeled after the effect lever 15 is displayed.

For example, in the case of (a2), a button image bg and "Press!" are displayed to encourage the user to operate the effect button 14, and the sound "Press" is also output. On the other hand, in the case of (b2), a lever image leg and "Pull!" are displayed to encourage the user to operate the effect lever 15, and the sound "Pull" is also output.

Then, the result of the determination is notified in response to the lapse of the valid operation time, or in response to the operation of the effect button 14 in the case of (a2), or the operation of the effect lever 15 in the case of (b2).
For example, if the special symbol is a hit, as shown in (a3) and (b3), the movable body 28 moves to the operating position (performs the movable body operation performance), and each of the decorative symbols 26a to 26c is temporarily stopped at "444" in the upper right of the display area to notify the special symbol win. On the other hand, if the special symbol is a miss, the movable body 28 does not move to the operating position (remains at the origin position), and each of the decorative symbols 26a to 26c is temporarily stopped at "454" in the upper right of the display area to notify the special symbol win.

Next, the conversation preview will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 43 to FIG.
Figure 43 (a1) (b1) shows a scene in which a transition has been made to a super reach (for example, super reach 2), and each of the decorative patterns 26a to 26c has moved to the top right of the display area and is displayed in a reduced size.

(a2) shows the start of the conversation preview, where first, the conversation image con1-1 is displayed in "white" characters (white letters) in which the ally character chaA says "It's time for a fight." Also, a voice saying "It's time for a fight" is output from the speaker 10.
(b2) differs from (a2) only in that the conversation image con1-2, such as "It's a contest," is displayed in "red" characters. For convenience, the "red" characters are written in bolder type than the "white" characters. The "red" characters correspond to the conversation (red) in FIG. 35(a), and the "white" characters correspond to the conversation (white) in FIG. 35(a).
In addition, in the conversation preview, there is no difference in the expectation of winning the special chart due to the sound (speech sound effect) like the dialogue preview. For example, a sound such as "It's a match" is output, but the same sound is output whether it is white text or red text.

(a3) shows a continuation of the conversation preview, in which a conversation image con2-1 is displayed in "white" letters (white characters) from the enemy character chaB saying "There's no chance of winning" in response to the conversation from the friendly character chaA in (a2). Also, a voice saying "There's no chance of winning" is output from the speaker 10.
(b3) is different from (a3) only in that the conversation image con2-2, which says "You have no chance of winning," is displayed in "red" characters (red letters).

(a4) shows a continuation of the conversation preview, in which a conversation image con3-1 is displayed in "white" characters (white letters) from the friendly character chaA saying "I won't lose" in response to the conversation from the enemy character chaB in (a3). Also, a voice saying "I won't lose" is output from the speaker 10.
(b4) differs from (a4) only in that the conversation image con3-2, "I won't lose," is displayed in "red" characters (red letters).

44(a5) shows a continuation of the conversation preview, in which a conversation image con4-1 such as "Let's go" from enemy character chaB is displayed in "white" characters (white letters) in response to the conversation from friendly character chaA in (a4). Also, a voice such as "Let's go" is output from speaker 10.
(b5) is different from (a5) only in that the conversation image con4-2 such as "Let's go" is displayed in "red" characters (red letters).
Incidentally, (a5), (b5), (a6), (b6), (a7), and (b7) are the same as those in FIG. 42, and therefore their explanation will be omitted.

When the result of the judgment is notified in (a7) and (b7), the ally character chaA is displayed again in (a8), and a conversation image con5-1 such as "Your training has paid off" is displayed in "white" characters (white characters). Also, a voice such as "Your training has paid off" is output from the speaker 10.
(b8) differs from (a8) only in that the conversation image con5-2, "Your training has paid off," is displayed in "red" characters (red letters).

45(a9) shows a continuation of the conversation preview, in which a conversation image con6-1 is displayed in "white" characters (white letters) saying "Excellent..." from the enemy character chaB in response to the conversation from the friendly character chaA in (a8). Also, a voice saying "Excellent" is output from the speaker 10.
(b9) is different from (a9) only in that the conversation image con6-2 such as "wonderful" is displayed in "red" characters (red characters).

The execution period from the start of the conversation preview at (a2) (b2) to the end of the conversation preview at (a9) (b9) is, for example, about 25 seconds.
In other words, the execution period is longer than the execution period of the dialogue preview (red) (2.5 seconds) and the execution period of the two stages of dialogue (red) (5.5 seconds).
This makes it possible to prevent the dialogue announcement before the reach from becoming redundant and decreasing interest in the game, and the dialogue announcement before the judge performance can increase interest in the game by stirring up the tension of whether or not there will be a hit for a long period of time.

In addition, in a conversation preview in which the expectation of a special winning pattern does not change depending on the number of times the conversation (red) is displayed, there is no need to count the number of times the conversation (red) is displayed over a long period of time, so the player can focus on the conversation preview. On the other hand, in a line preview in which the expectation of a special winning pattern changes depending on the number of times a line (red) is displayed, it is necessary to count the number of times the line (red) is displayed over a short period of time, so the player can focus on the line preview.

Then, at (a10) and (b10), each of the decorative pattern images 26a to 26c is temporarily stopped at "444", the effect button 14 vibrates (executing the button vibration effect when a win occurs), and at (a11) and (b11), each of the decorative pattern images 26a to 26c is confirmed at "444", and the vibration of the effect button 14 stops.
Also, similar to the vibration effect, the effect button LED lights up in rainbow colors at (a10) and (b10) (executing the button light-up effect when a win occurs), and the rainbow light-up of the effect button LED ends at (a11) and (b11).

In this way, in the conversation preview, friendly character chaA and enemy character chaB have a conversation, and the difference in the text color of the conversation image suggests the degree of expectation of a special win. Specifically, "red" text (red text) suggests a higher expectation of a special win than "white" text (white text), so just like with other previews (for example, dialogue previews and reserve read-ahead performances), it is possible to have a common understanding that "red" has a higher expectation. This allows players to play while hoping for the "red" text (red text) to be displayed.

In addition, even after the judgment result (special winnings) is announced in (a7) and (b7), (a8), (b8), (a9), and (b9) continue to use the same text color as before (a7) and (b7). In other words, after (a7), the conversation announcements (a8) and (a9) continue to be executed in "white" text (white text), and after (b8), the conversation announcements (b8) and (b9) continue to be executed in "red" text (red text). This allows for a sense of unity until the confirmation display, and allows the player to move on to the big win game without feeling uncomfortable. Also, since the entire conversation announcement only needs to be the same color, simple processing can be done, and the control load can be reduced.

In addition, the ``white'' characters (white letters) in the conversation preview may be displayed using only white, or in order to improve visibility, the entire character may be white with only the edges of the character in black, etc.
Similarly, the "red" letters (red characters) in the conversation preview may be displayed using only the color red, or, to improve visibility, the entire letters may be red with only the edges of the letters in black, etc.
In any case, using normal colors means that white is used for some or all of the text in the conversation preview, and using a specific color means that red is used for some or all of the text in the conversation preview.

Figures 43 to 45 only show examples of winning special symbols, and do not show examples of losing special symbols. However, if the special symbol is a losing symbol, (a8), (b8), (a9), and (b9) are not performed. Instead, (a7) and (b7) are used to notify the player of the loss, and (a10) and (b10) are used to temporarily stop and display the losing symbol combination, and (a11) and (b11) are used to confirm the losing symbol combination. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable when a conversation announcement is made in "red" characters (red characters) in particular (b8) and (b9).

On the other hand, if the special drawing is a miss, the conversation announcement in (a8), (b8), (a9), or (b9) may be made. This makes it easier to recognize in which text color the conversation announcement was made even after the special drawing is notified, and makes it easier to check how highly anticipated the announcement was when going back and checking.

Also, (a8), (b8), (a9), and (b9) may be uniformly executed in "white" text (white characters) to announce the conversation. This allows the player to be entertained by the conversation announcement even after the announcement of the judgment result, while preventing the player from having strange expectations (for example, expectations that the reach will develop further).

Also, for example, if the conversation preview in FIG. 43 (a2) is set to one, the number of conversation previews may be set arbitrarily. For example, the conversation preview may consist of four previews, or six previews. Any of these may be included, or both may be included. Note that, regardless of the number of previews, the execution period will be longer than the execution period (e.g., 5.5 seconds) of the two-stage dialogue (red) in the dialogue preview.

FIG. 46 is a simplified time chart (normal game mode) summarizing the above-mentioned preview effects.
This time chart mainly explains the relationship between the expectation of winning a special prize and differences in preview performance.

When the fluctuation starts at timing T1, the line preview can be executed. In case 1, the line (red) above (line image SE1) is executed, and in case 2, the line (red) above (line image SE1) and the line (red) below (line image SE2) are executed.
In this case, the expectation of winning the special chart is higher in Case 2, and when comparing the dialogue preview with the dialogue (red), it can be said that the more lines there are, the higher the expectation of winning the special chart.

When a reach (normal reach) occurs at timing T2, a logo announcement can be executed. In case 1, a chance (logo image log1) is executed once, and in case 2, a pseudo consecutive win (e.g., pseudo consecutive win 3) is executed, and a chance (logo image log1) is executed three times.
In this case, when comparing the number of chances (logo image log1) executed, excluding the number of pseudo consecutive wins, the expectation of a special winning pattern is equal (unchanged) in both cases 1 and 2. In other words, unlike the dialogue preview, the expectation of a special winning pattern does not change depending on the number of times, and the expectation of a special winning pattern is constant whether the logo preview is executed once or three times.

When a super reach occurs at timing T3, a conversation preview can be executed. In case 1, a conversation preview consisting of four conversations is executed: conversation 1 (red) ally (character), conversation 2 (red) enemy (character), conversation 3 (red) ally (character), and conversation 4 (red) enemy (character), and in case 2, a conversation preview consisting of six conversations is executed: conversation 1 (red) ally (character), conversation 2 (red) enemy (character), conversation 3 (red) ally (character), conversation 4 (red) enemy (character), conversation 5 (red) ally (character), and conversation 6 (red) enemy (character).
In this case, the expectation of winning the special chart is equal (unchanged) in both cases 1 and 2. In other words, unlike dialogue previews, where the expectation of winning the special chart changes depending on the number of times, in the conversation preview, the expectation of winning the special chart is determined by the difference in text color, but the expectation of winning the special chart is not determined by the number of times. For example, whether the conversation (red) is displayed once or twice, the expectation of winning the special chart is constant, and whether it is displayed four times as in case 1 or six times as in case 2, the expectation of winning the special chart is constant.

When the execution timing of the judge performance arrives at timing T4, the judge performance can be executed. In case 1, the performance button is executed in the judge performance, and in case 2, the performance lever is executed in the judge performance. In this case, the expectation of a special winning chart is higher in case 2.

When the timing of the judgment result announcement in the judge performance comes at timing T5, the judgment result is announced. When the special chart hit is announced in the judgment result announcement, a conversation announcement can be executed (see FIG. 44 (a8) (b8), FIG. 45 (a9) (b9)). In case 1, a conversation announcement consisting of two times, conversation 1 (red) ally (character) and conversation 2 (red) enemy (character), is executed, and in case 2, a conversation announcement consisting of four times, conversation 1 (red) ally (character), conversation 2 (red) enemy (character), conversation 3 (red) ally (character), and conversation 4 (red) enemy (character), is executed.
In this case, since the judgment result has already been announced at timing T5, the expectation of the special winning pattern is equal (unchanged) in both cases 1 and 2, and the expectation of the time-saving game state being executed is also equal (unchanged). In other words, in this scene, whether the conversation notice (red) is executed two or four times, the expectation of the special winning pattern is constant, and the expectation of the time-saving game state being executed is also constant. After that, the game is stopped at timing T6.

When the result of the hit is announced at timing T5, the moving body action effect (see FIG. 44) and the button vibration effect when the special chart is hit (see FIG. 45) are executed, but these effects are executed when the result of the hit is announced, and the execution expectation does not change depending on the number of conversations (red) in the conversation preview. For example, whether the conversation (red) is displayed once or twice, the execution expectation of the effect is constant, and whether it is displayed four times as in case 1 or six times as in case 2, the execution expectation of the effect is constant. In other words, regardless of the number of times the conversation (red) is executed (displayed), the execution expectation of the specific effect (for example, the moving body action effect, the button vibration effect when the special chart is hit) executed after the conversation preview ends is constant. This eliminates the need to count the number of times the conversation (red) is executed (displayed), allowing the player to concentrate on the conversation preview.

In this way, in a variable presentation where "red" is executed in the line preview and "red" is executed in the conversation preview, the expectation of a special winning pattern changes depending on the number of times the line preview is executed, but the expectation of a special winning pattern does not change depending on the number of times the conversation preview is executed. In other words, from timing T1 to timing T2, the player's interest is in whether or not a reach will occur, and this is a scene in which the player is paying close attention to the various preview presentations. In such a scene, by making the expectation of a special winning pattern differ depending on the number of times the line preview (red) is executed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict subsequent developments (for example, whether or not a super reach will be executed). The same idea applies to the button vibration preview that can be executed in the scene.

On the other hand, at timing T3 to timing T4, the player is interested in whether or not the game will win, and is paying attention to the "color" rather than the number of times the preview is executed. In other words, in the case of a cut-in preview, the player would prefer "red" to be executed (displayed) rather than "green," and in the case of a conversation preview, the player would prefer "red" to be executed (displayed) rather than "white." This prevents the machine from becoming difficult for players to understand, as the player's expectations for a special win differ depending on the number of times the preview is executed, before simply notifying the player of whether the special win or loss has occurred.
In other words, depending on the situation (depending on what the player focuses on), importance is placed on the number of times the notice is executed or on the color of the notice, so that notices can be executed in a balanced manner throughout the entire variable presentation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in the line preview executed from timing T1 to timing T2, a difference in the expectation level for a special winning pattern due to sound (line sound effect) is set between the line (white) and the line (red), but in the conversation preview executed from timing T3 to timing T4, there is no difference in the expectation level for a special winning pattern due to sound (line sound effect) between white characters and red characters.
This allows for suitable sound effects to be performed according to each scene. For example, in a scene where there is interest in whether or not a reach will occur (a dialogue preview), differences in the expectation of a special winning pattern can be provided by sound (differences made by display and sound), making the player more interested in the developments after the reach.
On the other hand, in situations where there is interest in whether or not a win will occur (conversational preview), by not varying the expectation of a special win through sound (by making the difference only through display), it is possible to prevent the player's concentration from being hindered by providing more information than necessary.

FIG. 47 shows an example of a state in which a special winning symbol is hit during normal gameplay and one jackpot is played.
Specifically, as shown in (a), at the start of the third round during the first big win game, a message such as "Press the button to get a RUSH!" is displayed. Then, as the third round progresses, as shown in (b), a fade-in effect (an effect suggesting that the button image is completed) is executed, and the button image is displayed and the number of seconds until the effect button 14 becomes operable is counted down ("3! 2! ..." in the figure).

After that, as shown in (c), the fade-in effect ends, and a button image (green), an operation valid time image YK indicating the operation valid time, and a message such as "Press it!" are displayed, encouraging the player to operate the effect button 14. At this time, the effect button LED emits light in the color (green) that corresponds to the button image (green). In addition, the speaker 10 outputs the sound "Press it" in conjunction with the display of the message such as "Press it!".

When the player operates the effect button 14 (if no operation is performed, the effective operation time expires), if the special symbol A is displayed as a confirmed symbol and the game moves to the jackpot 1 game, the movable body 28 falls, as shown in (d1), and the message "GET!!" is displayed, indicating that a RUSH has been acquired. On the other hand, if the special symbol B is displayed as a confirmed symbol and the game moves to the jackpot 1 game, as shown in (d2), the movable body 28 does not fall, and an image imitating smoke and a message "Too bad..." are displayed, indicating that a RUSH has not been acquired. In this way, if a special symbol is hit during normal gameplay, an effect (judgment during jackpot) is executed to notify whether or not a RUSH has been acquired during the jackpot 1 game. Therefore, the game does not become monotonous, as it is only necessary to make the game ball enter the first big prize opening 24, and the game can be more interesting.

In addition, in some cases where special symbol A is determined, the decorative symbol combination "777" may be displayed as a confirmed combination. In this case, the acquisition of "RUSH" may be announced along with the confirmed display of "777", and during one big win, a special movie or the like may be displayed instead of an announcement of whether or not a RUSH has been acquired. This can further lift the spirits of the player who realizes that a "RUSH" has been acquired at the confirmation display stage, and increase their motivation to play.

Furthermore, after (d2), the player may be notified that "RUSH" has been acquired. For example, at the end of the fourth round, the movable body 28 may be suddenly dropped to notify that "RUSH" has been acquired. In this way, the player's hope of acquiring "RUSH" can be maintained until the very end, and it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing at the (d2) stage.

The color of the LED light emitted by the effect button 14 (and the color of the effect button image) may also be used to suggest the degree of expectation of acquiring a "RUSH". For example, when special symbol A is determined, the LED light color (and the color of the effect button image) may be made to be "red" easily selected, and when special symbol B is determined, the LED light color (and the color of the effect button image) may be made to be "green" easily selected, suggesting the degree of expectation of acquiring a "RUSH". The color of the message displayed in FIG. 47(a) may also be "red" or "white" to suggest the degree of expectation of acquiring a "RUSH". This configuration allows the degree of expectation to be understood in stages, improving interest in the game.

In addition, if a "left hit" is performed during the time-saving play state, and the ball enters the first starting hole 21, resulting in a special winning pattern (special pattern A, B), the presentation shown in FIG. 47 is also executed. This makes it easier for the player to understand that the game will transition to the time-saving play state even if the ball enters the first starting hole 21 during the time-saving play state, because a presentation is executed as to whether or not the game will transition to the time-saving play state.

FIG. 48 shows a continuation of FIG. 47(d1).
As shown in (d3), when the fourth round starts, a message such as "Press the button to select your favorite mode!" is displayed. After that, the screen changes to that shown in (d4), and the effective operation time of the cross key button 16 and the effect button 14 is set.

There are three modes: Mode A, Mode B, and Mode C. The cursor is switched using the left and right buttons on the cross key button 16, and the mode is confirmed by pressing the effect button 14. In the example of (d4), the square-shaped cursor is positioned on Mode A, and pressing the effect button 14 in this state confirms Mode A.

The mode is intended to refer to the entire mode during the RUSH, including during the time-saving play state, during jackpot 1 play, and during small wins through jackpot 2 play. Mode A is a mode in which an "icon effect" is executed during jackpot 1 play and jackpot 2 play, mode B is a mode in which a "post-announcement" is executed during jackpot 1 play and jackpot 2 play, and mode C is a mode in which a "battle announcement" is executed during jackpot 1 play and jackpot 2 play. The modes are described in detail in Figures 56 and 57.

Once the mode is determined, as shown in (d5), a message such as "Mode A selected!" and only the Mode A icon are displayed. Then, when the fourth round is completed, the game transitions to the ending and the entry into the RUSH is announced. Specifically, as shown in (d6), a message such as "Entering RUSH!" is displayed in the center of the screen, a "right hit image" is displayed at the bottom of the screen, and the selected "mode image (here, Mode A)" is displayed at the top right of the screen. In addition, a RUSH measurement image 26ti that indicates the time spent in the RUSH, and a score image 26sc (here, "SCORE00600") that corresponds to the number of balls acquired by putting game balls into the first large winning hole 24 and the second large winning hole 32 during the RUSH are displayed.

The measurement image 26ti during the RUSH will be described later in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60. The score image 26sc corresponding to the number of acquired balls is an image that displays the number of acquired balls acquired by having game balls enter the first large winning hole 24 and the second large winning hole 32 during the RUSH from one big win game when a special symbol is hit in the normal game state and the special symbol A is determined (the prize balls are counted and stored in a counter in the sub-RAM 203, and the counter value is displayed as the score image 26sc). For example, 10 balls can be entered into the first large winning hole 24 per round, and 15 prize balls can be acquired per ball entry, so 150 balls per round, which is for four rounds, is displayed as "SCORE00600" in FIG. 48 (d6).

The score image 26sc can display five digits, with the MAX display being "99999". For example, even if the jackpot 2 game is played when "99000" is displayed, the display will not change to "100500" but will stop at "99999", and even if the jackpot 2 game is played when "99999" is displayed, the display will continue to show "99999". The same applies to the counter value in the sub-RAM 203.

Note that if 11 game balls enter the big prize slot in one round, the prize ball 15 corresponding to the 11th ball is not added to the total, but it may be added. Also, balls that enter the start prize slot or the normal prize slot are not added to the total, but they may be added.

The score image 26sc is displayed during the small win, big win 2 and big win 1 games in the RUSH mode, but is not displayed during the time-saving game mode. This makes it easy to understand that the information related to the number of balls won by having the ball enter the big prize opening is displayed. Of course, it may also be displayed during the time-saving game mode.

FIG. 49 is a diagram showing details of the small win game through the big win 2 game when mode A is selected.
In the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment, in the confirmation display of the symbol variation game in the time-saving play state, the RUSH is not notified whether or not it will continue, but the RUSH is notified whether or not it will continue during the big win play after the confirmation display. In addition, when the special symbol wins (special symbol D), the RUSH continuation may be notified at the confirmation display. Also, when the RUSH continuation is notified at the confirmation display of the special symbol win (special symbol D), the icon performance corresponding to mode A may not be executed during the execution of the big win 1 play, or may be executed.

Figure 49 (a) shows details of the small hit game to the big hit 2 game (continuation notification in the 9th round).
In the first round, the state is a small win game, and the main effects executed include "Aim for the V!", which encourages the player to place the game ball in a specific area of the second large winning opening 32, the update display of the measurement image 26ti during the RUSH, and the update display of the score image 26sc. On the other hand, the icon effect dedicated to mode A has not yet been executed, and even if the game ball has entered the second large winning opening 32, the winning emphasis effect that notifies the player that the game ball has entered is not executed.

Figure 50 (a) shows the display mode of the image display device 26 in the first round, and displays a round 1 image indicating the first round, a mode A image indicating the selected mode, a rush measurement image 26ti (updating display), and a score image 26sc (updating display). In addition, "Aim for V!" is displayed in a larger size than these images, and at this time the sound "Aim for V!" is also output from the speaker 10. In addition, an image showing % (percentage) scrolls vertically above "Aim for V!", teasing the player what percentage will be displayed as the initial %.

After "Aim for V!" is displayed, if the player hits the ball to the right without delay, the ball can easily land in the specific area of the second large prize slot 32, so that even players who are unfamiliar with the game can easily move from small win play to big win 2 play. When the ball is placed in the specific area, "Aim for V!" is hidden, as shown in FIG. 50(b), and instead "Get V!" (an image suggesting a move to big win 2 play) is displayed. Here, since it is still the first round, the icon effect has not been executed, and the image showing the percentage continues to scroll.

After the game ball enters the specific area, the game moves to the second round (jackpot 2 play), and the state remains in jackpot 2 play until the tenth round. From the second round, the icon effects and the winning emphasis effects begin. These are executed until the end of the eighth round. Also, the update display of the measurement image 26ti during the RUSH and the update display of the score image 26sc are executed continuously. From the second round, it becomes possible to suggest the continuation of the RUSH by displaying the percentage of the icon effects, and at the beginning of the second round, the scrolling percentage display stops and the initial percentage is displayed. For example, in the example of FIG. 50(c), 30% is displayed as the initial percentage.

After that, as shown in FIG. 50(d), the % display moves to the left of the display area while decreasing in size, and is displayed as a continuation suggestion image 26ks below the RUSH measurement image 26ti. In addition, as the % display moves, an icon effect image 26ai is displayed below the display area. The icon effect image 26ai is displayed using the entire left-right area at the bottom of the display area, and a target image (indicated by ◎ in the figure) located at the left end and multiple images with numbers (number images) are displayed in sequence. The number image (hereinafter also referred to as an icon) moves one to the left when one game ball is placed in the first large winning hole 24. For example, when the first ball is placed in the first large winning hole 24 in the second round, the number image marked "1" moves toward the target image and disappears when it overlaps with the target image. Additionally, the number images marked "2," "3," "4," and "5" also move to the left along with this, and a new number image marked "6" appears from the right of the display area. After that, when the second ball enters the first large prize opening 24, the number image marked "2" moves toward the target image and disappears when it overlaps with the target image. The number images marked "3," "4," "5," and "6" also move to the left along with this, and a new number image marked "7" appears from the right of the display area.

Since 10 balls can enter the slot per round, the number images displayed per round are "1" to "10". On the other hand, if the 10th and 11th game balls flow down the big prize slot in succession, the 11th game ball may enter the slot (a so-called over-winning), but the number images that anticipate an over-winning are not displayed.

At the start of the second round, the number images that are visibly displayed are 1 through 5, with 6 through 10 being invisible. When the ball lands in the big prize slot that corresponds to 1 through 5, the numbers 6 through 10 slide to the left and become visible in sequence.

From rounds 2 to 7, a number image for the next round is displayed next to (to the right of) the number image "10," which corresponds to the 10th ball scoring. For example, when the number image "10" overlaps with the target image, number images for the next round with numbers "1," "2," "3," "4," and "5" are displayed. On the other hand, in the 8th round, no number image is displayed next to (to the right of) the number image "10," suggesting the end of the icon performance.

When a number image overlaps with a target image and disappears, an effect image may be displayed and the percentage may be added, with the expected degree of addition differing depending on the type of icon that makes up the number image. Icon types will be described later, but for example, the expected degree of addition is higher when a "green" icon type is displayed than when a "white" icon type is displayed. Note that in the example of Figure 50(d), for convenience, "white" icons are shown as circles (with the numbers 1 to 4 attached) and "green" icons are shown as diamonds (with the number 5 attached).

Although it is simplified in FIG. 50(e), in terms of the timeline, when the diamond-shaped number image (number 5) moves to the target image, the effect image "GOOD" is displayed in front of the target image. After the effect image "GOOD" is displayed, the "+5%" indicating the added value is displayed in the center of the display area. Then, when the "+5%" indicating the added value is displayed, the "+5%" image moves to the continuation suggestion image 26ks (overlaps with the continuation suggestion image 26ks) as shown by the dotted arrow, and the value of the continuation suggestion image 26ks is updated. In this case, "5%" is added to the "30%" of the continuation suggestion image 26ks, updating it to "35%". Note that if no addition is made, for example, the number image will overlap the target image and disappear, or a blank effect image will be displayed and no addition will be made.

In addition, when a game ball enters the first large prize opening 24, a prize highlighting effect (an image showing "+15") is executed to notify the player of the ball entering the large prize opening, separate from the icon effect. The "+15" image then moves to the score image 26sc (overlaps with the score image 26sc), as shown by the dotted arrow, and the value of the score image 26sc is updated. Here, "15 balls" are added to the "SCORE00810" in the score image 26sc, updating it to "SCORE00825."

If the game ball is not inserted into the first large winning hole 24, the number image does not move, and the icon effect is stopped. For example, as shown in FIG. 50(d), even if a diamond (with the number 5) with a high expected addition rate is displayed (even if it has been decided that an addition will actually be performed), if the game ball is not inserted into the first large winning hole 24, no addition will be performed. Also, if the game ball is not inserted into the first large winning hole 24, the number image is replaced with one corresponding to the next round at the start of the next round. This allows the icon effect to be resumed with the number image (scenario) corresponding to the fourth round, for example, if the game ball is not inserted in the third round and the game ball is started to be shot in the fourth round, so that the icon effect can be prevented from being performed halfway.

In addition, if the game ball does not enter the first large winning slot 24 and the number image that was originally supposed to be added is not added, the % value at the end of the eighth round will be displayed as it is as "TOTAL %" (Figure 50 (f)). In other words, a value other than the final % shown in Figure 52 (b) may be displayed in the end. This prevents unnatural % correction from being made, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 49, in the 9th round, a jackpot judgment is executed. Figure 49 (a) shows an example in which a continuation notification is executed in the 9th round of a jackpot judgment, so it is referred to as a "continuation notification" here. Also, even while a jackpot judgment is being executed, the update display of the RUSH measurement image 26ti and the update display of the score image 26sc are executed. On the other hand, the icon presentation and the winning highlight presentation are not executed.

Figure 50 (f) shows the display mode of the image display device 26 in the 9th round, and at the beginning of the 9th round, the final % of the icon effects that were executed in rounds 2 to 8 is displayed. For example, "TOTAL 90%" is displayed to notify that "30%" was displayed as the initial % in Figure 50 (c), and that as a result of additions, it has finally been updated to "90%". Also, at this time, the update display of the RUSH measurement image 26ti and score image 26sc is executed. Note that the initial % has multiple initial % depending on the continuation expectation (described later in Figure 52).

Next, after the final % of the icon effect is erased, a jackpot judgment is executed as shown in Figure 50 (g). In the jackpot judgment, the player is prompted to operate the effect button 14 or effect lever 15 (or, if no operation is performed, the valid operation time has elapsed) to inform the player whether the RUSH will continue or not. In the example of Figure 50 (g), an effect button image (green), a valid operation time image YK, and a message such as "Push!" are displayed. Also, at this time, the updated display of the RUSH measurement image 26ti and score image 26sc is executed.

When the player operates the device or the effective operation time has elapsed, the movable body 28 falls as shown in FIG. 50(h), indicating that the RUSH will continue. Even at this time, the RUSH measurement image 26ti and score image 26sc are updated and displayed, but are difficult to see due to the continuation notification effects (the movable body 28 and effect images around the movable body 28, etc.).

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 49 again, in the 10th round, the word "NEXT RUSH" is displayed, suggesting that the game will move to a time-saving game state after the end of the two big win games. Even at this time, the updated display of the measurement image 26ti during the RUSH and the score image 26sc is executed. Then, when the 10th round ends, a continuation ending (continuation ED) is executed. For example, the execution time of the continuation ED is 14 seconds. The display mode of the 10th round and the display mode of the continuation ED are not shown in the figures.

Next, FIG. 49(b) shows details of the small win game to the big win 2 game (continuation notification in the ED). In other words, it shows an example where the continuation notification is not executed during the big win judgment in the 9th round, but is executed in the end ending (end ED). Note that the configuration of the 1st to 8th rounds is the same as in FIG. 49(a), so the explanation is omitted.

Then, in the jackpot judgment of the ninth round, a non-continuation notification is executed. Figures 51 (g) and (h) show the display mode of the non-continuation notification, and as a result of the player operating the effect button 14, the movable body 28 does not fall, and an image imitating smoke and a message such as "Too bad..." are displayed. Also, at this time, the update display of the measurement image 26ti during the RUSH and the score image 26sc is executed. Then, in the tenth round, "NEXT RUSH" is not displayed, and the update display of the measurement image 26ti during the RUSH and the score image 26sc is executed.

Then, when the tenth round is completed, the end ending (end ED) is executed. In this embodiment, when a continuation notification is made at the end ED, one of two types of revival effects is executed: "revival at the start of ED" and "revival while the results are displayed". With "revival at the start of ED", a continuation notification is executed as soon as the game transitions to the end ED, and the effect related to "revival at the start of ED" is executed for approximately 14 seconds. On the other hand, with "revival while the results are displayed", the game transitions to the end ED, the results are displayed for 8 seconds, a continuation notification is executed at the 9th second mark, and the effect related to "revival while the results are displayed" is executed for the next 6 seconds.

Figure 51 (l) (m) shows the mode of "revival at the start of ED". When the non-continuation notification is executed in Figure 51 (h) and the 10th round is also completed, the transition to the end ED shown in Figure 51 (k) occurs. In the case of "revival at the start of ED", the movable body 28 falls as soon as the transition to this end ED occurs, and the continuation notification is executed, so the display content in the end ED is difficult to see. Then, the movable body 28 returns to the original position, and as shown in Figure 51 (m), the display of "NEXT RUSH" is executed, suggesting a transition to a time-saving game state. The above-mentioned "revival at the start of ED" performance is executed for approximately 14 seconds, which means that Figure 51 (l) is executed for 4 seconds and Figure 51 (m) is executed for 10 seconds.

Figure 51 (k), (l), and (m) show the "Revival during result display" mode. When the non-continuation notification is executed in Figure 51 (h) and the 10th round is also completed, the game transitions to the end ED shown in Figure 51 (k). In the case of "Revival during result display", the game result during the RUSH is first notified in Figure 51 (k). The game result consists of the measurement image 26ti during the RUSH (up to the end of the previous 10 rounds), the score image 26sc (up to the end of the previous 10 rounds), the win count image 26wi indicating the number of times the jackpot 1 game or the jackpot 2 game was executed in the time-saving game state, the title image 26sg corresponding to the numerical value indicated by the score image 26sc, and the ally character chaA.

A rush measurement image 26ti (here, TIME02:00) is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area, and directly below that, a score image 26sc (here, SCORE02100) is displayed, and directly below that, a win count image 26wi (here, 1 win) is displayed, and to the left of these, ally character chaA is displayed, and at the bottom of the display area, a title image 26sg (here, the resurrected Gachagachaman) is displayed.

The rush measurement image 26ti, score image 26sc, and win count image 26wi each have a different font and color, making each piece of information easy to recognize even when the three pieces of information are arranged vertically. In addition, by displaying these pieces of information close to each other, the player can, for example, photograph the three pieces of information together in one frame using a photographing device he or she owns, providing the player with an even greater sense of satisfaction.

Details of title image 26sg will be given later, but here, "Revival Title 1" is displayed, suggesting that a continuation announcement of RUSH will be made. Then, when FIG. 51(k) is displayed for eight seconds, the continuation announcement shown in FIG. 51(l) is made, and then FIG. 51(m) is made. The above-mentioned execution of the effect related to "Revival during result display" over the next six seconds means that FIG. 51(l) will be executed for four seconds, and FIG. 51(m) will be executed for two seconds.

Next, FIG. 49(c) shows details of the small win game to the big win 2 game (non-continuation notification). In other words, it shows an example in which the continuation notification is not executed during the big win judgment in the 9th round, and the continuation notification is not executed at the end ending (end ED). Note that the configuration of the 1st to 10th rounds is the same as that in FIG. 49(b), so the explanation is omitted.

In the final ending, the result display is executed for eight seconds, and at the ninth second mark, the "NEXT Normal" message is displayed, suggesting a transition to the normal game mode, and the "NEXT Normal" message is then displayed for the next six seconds. In other words, the timing at which the result display begins and the ninth second mark is the branching point at which either a revival during the result display is executed, or the "NEXT Normal" message is displayed. This makes it possible to draw attention to this timing.

Figures 51(i) and (j) show the "non-continuation notification" mode. When the non-continuation notification is executed in Figure 51(h) and the 10th round ends, the game transitions to the end ED shown in Figure 51(i). The display mode here is roughly the same as Figure 51(k), but "Title 1" is displayed for the title image 26sg, which does not suggest that a RUSH continuation notification will be executed. Then, when the display mode of Figure 51(i) is executed for 8 seconds, it switches to the display mode of Figure 51(j) and the "NEXT Normal" display begins.

The above-mentioned Figs. 49 to 51 are expected to have the following effects.
When mode A is selected, icon effects are executed from round 2 to round 8, and the continuation suggestion image 26ks can be updated according to the entry of a game ball into the first large prize winning hole 24. This allows added value to be added to the entry of a ball into the large prize winning hole, which previously only provided prize balls and was perceived as a chore, and allows fun in getting the ball into the large prize winning hole.

In addition, icon effects and winning highlight effects are not executed in the first round. This prevents the "Aim for the V!" that is executed in the first round from being hindered, for example, by getting distracted by the icon effects and missing or failing to hear "Aim for the V!", which leads to forgetting to score in a specific area. Also, by concentrating on scoring in a specific area in the first round, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to move on to the jackpot 2 game, which would result in losses for the player.

In addition, icon effects and winning highlight effects are not executed in the 9th round. This prevents the judgment during the big win executed in the 9th round from being hindered, for example, by the player being distracted by the icon effects and not being able to operate the effect button 14 in time, resulting in a lack of satisfaction for the player.

In addition, icon effects and prize highlighting effects are not executed in the tenth round. This allows the same control as in the ninth round, preventing the control process from becoming complicated. For example, if icon effects or prize highlighting effects were executed again in the tenth round, it would be necessary to change the control content from the ninth round, which would increase the control burden, but this can be prevented. Furthermore, the player is not given the impression that the icon effects and prize highlighting effects have been interrupted, so the cohesive effects can increase interest in the game.

In addition, when an additional value (e.g., +5%) is displayed in the icon effect, or when an additional value (e.g., +15) is displayed in the winning highlight effect, the display is updated by moving to the continuation suggestion image 26ks and score image 26sc, respectively. This makes it easy to understand what the continuation suggestion image 26ks and score image 26sc respectively indicate, providing a gaming machine that is easy to understand even for players who are unfamiliar with the game.

In addition, even during "Aim for V!", icon effects, or judgment during a big win, the RUSH measurement image 26ti and the score image 26sc can be updated and displayed. This allows the player to grasp the game situation one by one, improving the interest in the game.
In FIG. 49, the first round allows the update display of the measurement image 26ti and the score image 26sc during the RUSH, but it may not be executed (displayed). This prevents the player from being distracted by the update display and forgetting to enter a specific area. In addition, in the ninth round, the update display of the measurement image 26ti and the score image 26sc during the RUSH, but it may not be executed (displayed). This allows the player to concentrate on judging during the big win.

In addition, the initial % is not displayed clearly in the first round, but is displayed only in the second round. This prevents players from being distracted by the initial % being displayed in the first round and forgetting to score in the specific area. It is also possible to display the initial % at the beginning of the second round without scrolling in the first round or performing the effects related to the initial %. This allows players to focus on scoring in the specific area in the first round.

In addition, in the icon presentation, number images that anticipate over-winning are not displayed. This makes it easy for players to understand that (the displayed number images) correspond to the ball entering the big winning slot, without giving the player a sense of incongruity. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy to understand even for players who are unfamiliar with the game.

In addition, there are cases where a continuation notification is given in the 9th round and cases where a continuation notification is given at the end ending, and at the end ending, there is also a setting for a revival at the start of the ending and a revival while the results are displayed. This allows the timing of the RUSH continuation notification to be set at multiple points, so the fun and anticipation can continue.

In addition, after "NEXT Normal" is displayed in the final ending, the revival effect is not executed. This prevents confusion for the player.

In addition, the execution time for the continuation notification due to the drop (and return) of the movable body 28 is set to the same (4 seconds) whether the revival is performed at the start of the ending or while the result is being displayed. This means that there is no need to change the operation control of the movable body 28 between the revival at the start of the ending and the revival while the result is being displayed, so the existence of multiple revival effects increases interest in the game, while simplifying the operation control of the movable body 28.

The result display also shows game results such as a RUSH measurement image 26ti (up to the end of the previous 10 rounds), a score image 26sc (up to the end of the previous 10 rounds), a win count image 26wi indicating the number of times a jackpot 1 game or a jackpot 2 game was played in the time-saving game mode, and a title image 26sg corresponding to the numerical value indicated by the score image 26sc. This makes it easy to understand how much was won and in how long, giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

Next, various tables related to icon effects will be explained using Figures 52 to 54. Figures 52 to 54 are tables (for executing icon effects) that are stored in the sub-ROM 202 and are referenced when executing icon effects.

Figure 52 (a) is an initial % determination table, which is a table for determining the initial % displayed in Figure 50 (c). The initial % can be "0%, " "100%, " "10%, " "20%, " "30%, " "40%, " "50%", and the selected % rate differs depending on the special pattern D, special pattern F, and special pattern G.

Specifically, for special pattern D, "0%" is selected at "20/100", "100%" is selected at "20/100", "10%" is selected at "5/100", "20%" is selected at "5/100", "30%" is selected at "10/100", "40%" is selected at "20/100", and "50%" is selected at "20/100". In other words, for special pattern D, "0%, "100%, "40%", and "50%" tend to be selected.

For special pattern F, "0%" is selected with "10/100", "100%" is selected with "10/100", "10%" is selected with "5/100", "20%" is selected with "5/100", "30%" is selected with "20/100", "40%" is selected with "25/100", and "50%" is selected with "25/100". In other words, for special pattern F, "30%, "40%," and "50%" tend to be selected.

In the case of special pattern G, "0%" and "100%" are never selected, but rather "10%" is selected at "30/100", "20%" is selected at "30/100", "30%" is selected at "20/100", "40%" is selected at "10/100", and "50%" is selected at "10/100". In other words, in the case of special pattern G, "10%, "20%," and "30%" tend to be selected.

Special pattern D and special pattern F are special patterns that are determined to transition to a time-saving game state, and special pattern G is a special pattern that is determined to transition to a normal game state. Therefore, when "0%" or "100%" is displayed as the initial percentage, it is essentially an indication that the RUSH will continue.
In Figure 52 (a), excluding "0%" and "100%", the higher the RUSH continuation expectation, the more likely a higher value of % is to be selected (displayed) as the initial %, and the lower the RUSH continuation expectation, the more likely a lower value of % is to be selected (displayed) as the initial %.
In this way, the initial percentage first indicates the degree of expectation for the RUSH to continue.

Note that while "0%" and "100%" are in effect indications that the RUSH will continue, no effects that confirm the continuation of the RUSH (for example, "RUSH continues!") will be displayed in conjunction with these indications.

Figure 52(b) is a final % determination table, which is used to determine the "TOTAL XX%" (see Figure 50(f)) to be displayed at the beginning of the 9th round. As mentioned above, if no game ball enters the first large winning slot 24, no addition may be made, and in such a case, the determined final % will not be reached and "TOTAL XX%" will be displayed. The final % can be "77%, " "100%, " "60%, " "70%, " "80%, " "90%, and the selected % ratio varies depending on the special symbol D, special symbol F, and special symbol G.

Specifically, for special pattern D, "77%" is selected at "30/100", "100%" is selected at "30/100", "60%" is selected at "5/100", "70%" is selected at "5/100", "80%" is selected at "15/100", and "90%" is selected at "15/100". In other words, for special pattern D, "77%" and "100%" tend to be selected.

For special pattern F, "77%" is selected at "20/100", "100%" is selected at "20/100", "60%" is selected at "5/100", "70%" is selected at "15/100", "80%" is selected at "20/100", and "90%" is selected at "20/100". In other words, for special pattern F, "77%, "100%, "80%," and "90%" tend to be selected.

In the case of special pattern G, "77%" and "100%" are never selected, and "60%" is selected at "45/100", "70%" is selected at "40/100", "80%" is selected at "10/100", and "90%" is selected at "5/100". In other words, in the case of special pattern G, "60%" and "70%" tend to be selected.

Special pattern D and special pattern F are special patterns that are determined to transition to a time-saving game state, and special pattern G is a special pattern that is determined to transition to a normal game state. Therefore, when "77%" or "100%" is displayed as the final percentage, it essentially indicates that the RUSH will continue.
In Figure 52 (b), excluding "0%" and "100%", the higher the RUSH continuation expectation, the more likely a higher % value is to be selected (displayed) as the final %, and the lower the RUSH continuation expectation, the more likely a lower % value is to be selected (displayed) as the final %.
In this way, the final % indicates the degree of expectation of RUSH continuation, following the initial %. If "100%" is selected as the initial %, "100%" is also selected as the final % so as not to give the player a sense of incongruity.

Note that while "77%" and "100%" are in effect indications that the RUSH will continue, no effects that confirm the continuation of the RUSH (for example, "RUSH continues!") will be displayed in conjunction with these indications.

FIG. 52(c) is a % addition determination table, and a table for performing % addition is determined by referring to the initial % determined in FIG. 52(a) and the final % determined in FIG.
Specifically, if the initial % is "0%" and the final % is "77%", "Table A" is determined; if the initial % is "0%" and the final % is "100%", "Table B" is determined; if the initial % is "0%" and the final % is "60%", "Table C" is determined; if the initial % is "0%" and the final % is "70%", "Table D" is determined; if the initial % is "0%" and the final % is "80%", "Table E" is determined; and if the initial % is "0%" and the final % is "90%", "Table F" is determined.

If the initial % is "100%", as mentioned above, the final % is also "100%", so no table is selected here. If the initial % is "10%" and the final % is "77%, "Table G" is selected; if the initial % is "10%" and the final % is "100%, "Table F" is selected; if the initial % is "10%" and the final % is "60%, "Table H" is selected; if the initial % is "10%" and the final % is "70%, "Table C" is selected; if the initial % is "10%" and the final % is "80%, "Table D" is selected; and if the initial % is "10%" and the final % is "90%, "Table E" is selected.

If the initial % is "20%" and the final % is "77%", "Table I" is determined; if the initial % is "20%" and the final % is "100%", "Table E" is determined; if the initial % is "20%" and the final % is "60%", "Table J" is determined; if the initial % is "20%" and the final % is "70%", "Table H" is determined; if the initial % is "20%" and the final % is "80%", "Table C" is determined; if the initial % is "20%" and the final % is "90%", "Table D" is determined.

If the initial % is "30%" and the final % is "77%", "Table K" is determined; if the initial % is "30%" and the final % is "100%", "Table D" is determined; if the initial % is "30%" and the final % is "60%", "Table L" is determined; if the initial % is "30%" and the final % is "70%", "Table J" is determined; if the initial % is "30%" and the final % is "80%", "Table H" is determined; if the initial % is "30%" and the final % is "90%", "Table C" is determined.

If the initial % is "40%" and the final % is "77%", "Table M" is determined; if the initial % is "40%" and the final % is "100%", "Table C" is determined; if the initial % is "40%" and the final % is "60%", "Table N" is determined; if the initial % is "40%" and the final % is "70%", "Table L" is determined; if the initial % is "40%" and the final % is "80%", "Table J" is determined; if the initial % is "40%" and the final % is "90%", "Table H" is determined.

If the initial % is "50%" and the final % is "77%", "Table O" is determined; if the initial % is "50%" and the final % is "100%", "Table H" is determined; if the initial % is "50%" and the final % is "60%", "Table P" is determined; if the initial % is "50%" and the final % is "70%", "Table N" is determined; if the initial % is "50%" and the final % is "80%", "Table L" is determined; if the initial % is "50%" and the final % is "90%", "Table J" is determined.

Figure 53(e) is a % addition table, which defines the details for each table determined by the % addition determination table in Figure 52(c). Note that 16 % addition tables, Table A through Table P, are stored in the sub-ROM 202, but for the sake of explanation, only Table A and Table P are shown in Figure 53(e), and the other tables are omitted.

The % addition table is a table in which the value to be added in each of the 2nd to 8th rounds is determined, and each table has 16 different scenarios. One of the 16 scenarios is selected using a predetermined random number value.
For example, in the case of pattern 1 of table A, the 2nd round (round) is "+5", the 3rd round is "+5", the 4th round is "+10", the 5th round is "+10", the 6th round is "+20", the 7th round is "+20", and the 8th round is "+7". In the case of pattern 2, the 2nd round (round) is "+20", the 3rd round is "+20", the 4th round is "+20", the 5th round is "+10", the 6th round is "0 (no addition)", the 7th round is "+7", and the 8th round is "0 (no addition)". In the case of pattern 3, the 2nd round (round) is "+10", the 3rd round is "+20", the 4th round is "+20", the 5th round is "+20", the 6th round is "+7", the 7th round is "0 (no addition)", and the 8th round is "0 (no addition)". In other words, the sum of the added values in each pattern of Table A is "+77", and this is the table to be referenced when the initial percentage is determined to be "0%" and the final percentage is determined to be "77%".

The "+7" that may be added in each pattern of Table A is a special value added when the final percentage has been determined to be "77%" (a special value added to make the final percentage 77%). In other words, there are no other tables other than Table A that define "+7", so the display of "+7" essentially indicates that RUSH is confirmed to continue.

In addition, in patterns 1 to 16 in table A, no addition is made in the rounds after "+7". For example, in pattern 1, "+7" is added in the 8th round, in pattern 2, "+7" is added in the 7th round and the 8th round is "0", and in pattern 3, "+7" is added in the 6th round and the 7th and 8th rounds are "0". The same is true for other patterns not shown, for example, if "+7" is added in the 3rd round, the 4th to 8th rounds are "0". In other words, once 77% is displayed, it is updated and not overwritten with another value, and this tendency is the same in table B, which is used to make the final value 100%. As a result of the addition, there are multiple rounds in table A that are 77% (for example, rounds 3 to 8), and there are multiple rounds in table B that are 100% (for example, rounds 3 to 8). In other words, if you include the initial percentage determination factor, there are essentially multiple timing (rounds) (2-8 rounds) that indicate whether the RUSH will continue.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, when a game ball is placed in the second starting hole 22 during time-saving play, even if the special win does not occur, a small win is a 1/1 win, and if a small win occurs, as long as the player hits the right hand as instructed, two big wins can be acquired, so it can be said that this is an indication that the RUSH is continuing = the next big win game (mainly two big wins) is confirmed (consecutive wins confirmed). Therefore, the icon effect can also be said to be an effect that suggests the possibility of a big win game being played (so-called one-game streak).

Note that if there is a subsequent round after reaching 77% or 100%, the icon presentation will continue (but will not be overwritten with other values), but the icon presentation may end when 77% or 100% is reached. This allows the end of the icon presentation in the middle of a round (before the 8th round) to essentially indicate that the RUSH is definitely continuing, so it is possible to draw attention to the icon presentation ending in the middle of a round.

In addition, in the case of pattern 254 of table P, the 2nd R is "+10", and the 3rd to 8th R are "0 (no addition)". In the case of pattern 255, the 2nd to 4th R are "0 (no addition)", the 5th R is "+10", and the 6th to 8th R are "0 (no addition)". In the case of pattern 256, the 2nd to 3rd R are "0 (no addition)", the 4th R is "+5", the 5th R is "0 (no addition)", the 6th R is "+5", and the 7th to 8th R are "0 (no addition)". In other words, the sum of the added values in each pattern of table P is "+10", and this is the table that is referenced when "50%" is determined as the initial % and "60%" is determined as the final %. In this way, 16 tables according to the added values to be added according to the initial % and the final % are stored, and each table has 16 scenario patterns.

Figure 53 (f) is a table for determining the icon type. Icon type refers to the type of icon related to the round and diamond-shaped number images described in Figure 50. Icon types include "white", "blue", "yellow", "green", "purple", "red", and "rainbow".

In FIG. 53(f), the icon type for each round in the pattern determined in FIG. 53(e) is determined, and the color of one of the ten icons displayed per round is determined. The remaining nine icons are automatically determined to be "white." For example, if there is format data in which all ten icons are "white," the process may be such that this is overwritten according to the color determined by the icon type and the position determined by the addition icon position (FIG. 53(g)).

Specifically, if the percentage addition is "0", "white" is selected at "90/100", and "blue" is selected at "10/100". Here, if "white" is selected, all 10 icons displayed per round will be "white", and if "blue" is selected, one of the 10 icons displayed per round will be "blue", and the remaining 9 will be "white". In this case, the position of the "blue" (whether it is a number image 1-10) will be the position corresponding to count 2 (the second ball entering the big prize opening), for example.

When the percentage addition is "+5", "5/100" selects "white", "10/100" selects "blue", "15/100" selects "yellow", "20/100" selects "green", "30/100" selects "purple", and "20/100" selects "red". In other words, when it is "+5", "green", "purple", and "red" tend to be selected. When an addition is performed, the position of the icon (whether to use number image 1 to 10) is determined using Figure 53 (g) described below.

When the percentage addition is "+7", "2/100" selects "white", "2/100" selects "blue", "6/100" selects "yellow", "10/100" selects "green", "30/100" selects "purple", and "50/100" selects "red". In other words, when it is "+7", "red" tends to be selected.

When the percentage addition is "+10", "5/100" selects "white", "10/100" selects "blue", "15/100" selects "yellow", "20/100" selects "green", "25/100" selects "purple", and "25/100" selects "red". In other words, when it is "+10", "purple" and "red" tend to be selected.

When the percentage addition is "+20", "white", "blue", or "yellow" will never be selected, but "25/100" will select "green", "35/100" will select "purple", and "40/100" will select "red". In other words, when it is "+20", it is limited to "green", "purple", and "red".

The "rainbow" is positioned as a special icon, and can be displayed after reaching "77%" or "100%". For example, in the case of pattern 3 in FIG. 53(e), if "white" icons are displayed for all 7 and 8 rounds, interest in the presentation will wane, so in such a scenario, a "rainbow" is displayed to indicate that the continuation of the RUSH is confirmed. This makes it possible to be almost certain that the RUSH will continue, and prevents interest in the presentation from waning.

Figure 53 (g) is a table for determining the position of the addition icon (whether to use number images 1 to 10). "Count 1" corresponds to the first ball scoring in a round, and "Count 10" corresponds to the tenth ball scoring in a round. Note that for any icon type, when adding up, no icons are placed at the "Count 1" or "Count 10" positions.

Specifically, when "white" is determined as the icon type, "Count 2" is selected at "15/100", "Count 3" is selected at "15/100", "Count 4" is selected at "15/100", "Count 5" is selected at "15/100", "Count 6" is selected at "10/100", "Count 7" is selected at "10/100", "Count 8" is selected at "10/100", and "Count 9" is selected at "10/100".

When "blue" is determined as the icon type, "Count 2" is selected at "15/100", "Count 3" is selected at "15/100", "Count 4" is selected at "15/100", "Count 5" is selected at "15/100", "Count 6" is selected at "10/100", "Count 7" is selected at "10/100", "Count 8" is selected at "10/100", and "Count 9" is selected at "10/100".

When "yellow" is determined as the icon type, "Count 4" is selected at "40/100", "Count 5" is selected at "40/100", "Count 6" is selected at "20/100", and "Count 1", "Count 10", "Count 2", "Count 3", "Count 7" to "Count 9" are not selected.

When "green" is selected as the icon type, "Count 4" is selected at "20/100", "Count 5" is selected at "40/100", "Count 6" is selected at "40/100", and "Count 1", "Count 2", "Count 3", "Count 7" to "Count 9" are not selected, in addition to "Count 1" and "Count 10".

When "purple" is determined as the icon type, "Count 5" is selected at "20/100", "Count 6" is selected at "20/100", "Count 7" is selected at "20/100", "Count 8" is selected at "20/100", "Count 9" is selected at "20/100", and "Count 1", "Count 10", and "Count 2" through "Count 4" are not selected.

When "red" is determined as the icon type, "Count 6" is selected at "10/100", "Count 7" is selected at "40/100", "Count 8" is selected at "40/100", "Count 9" is selected at "10/100", and "Count 1", "Count 10", and "Count 2" through "Count 5" are not selected.

For example, if the % addition is "+20", the icon type is "red", and the position of the addition icon is "count 8", an icon effect image 26ai (see Figure 50) such as "white, white, white, white, white, white, white, red, white, white" (count 1 is on the left) will be displayed.

Figure 52 (d) is a table for determining the color display pattern (effect pattern) of the image display device 26, and the light emission pattern of the light-emitting device 9 and the board lighting device 29. In the icon presentation, the color display pattern of the image display device 26, etc. changes in response to the updated % value.

Specifically, as the icon performance progresses, when the value of the continuation suggestion image 26ks is between "0%" and "19%," it is displayed or illuminated in "white", when the value of the continuation suggestion image 26ks is between "20%" and "39%," it is displayed or illuminated in "blue", when the value of the continuation suggestion image 26ks is between "40%" and "59%," it is displayed or illuminated in "yellow", when the value of the continuation suggestion image 26ks is between "60%" and "79%," it is displayed or illuminated in "green", when the value of the continuation suggestion image 26ks is between "80%" and "89%," it is displayed or illuminated in "purple", when the value of the continuation suggestion image 26ks is between "90%" and "99%," it is displayed or illuminated in "red", and when the value of the continuation suggestion image 26ks is "100%," it is displayed or illuminated in "rainbow".

As mentioned above, "77%" and "100%" are essentially indications of the continuation of the RUSH, but they differ in that "77%" is displayed or illuminated in "green," while "100%" is displayed or illuminated in "rainbow." In this way, even when the value is 77%, it is uniformly displayed or illuminated in "green" as part of the "60%" to "79%" categories, simplifying the control process related to the display and illumination. Also, since "77%" has a lower visual confirmation factor than "100%" (as it does not reach the upper limit of 100), displaying or illuminating it in "green" can reduce the sense of incongruity felt by the player. On the other hand, for "100%," which has a higher visual confirmation factor, displaying or illuminating it in "rainbow" can help the player make a more certain prediction about the continuation of the RUSH.

If no ball goes into the first large winning slot 24, the color corresponding to the % displayed at that time can be displayed or lit up. For example, if the final % is to be displayed as 40%, the color can be displayed or lit up in "yellow". This prevents the appearance of discomfort caused by the final % being too different from the displayed and lit colors.

On the other hand, although the display of the final % does not include a corrected display (a corrected display to the value that had been determined as the final %), the display and illumination may be set to correspond to the determined final %. Specifically, if 60% had been determined as the final %, but no ball had entered the first large winning slot 24, and 40% was displayed at the timing of the final % display, the display and illumination will be set to "green." This allows the display and illumination to be performed by referring to only the determined final %, simplifying the control over the display and illumination.

FIG. 54(h) shows an icon change scenario table.
The icon change scenario table is a table for gradually changing the icon type determined in Fig. 53(f) to the final form from when the number image corresponding to the icon starts to be displayed until the target image is reached, with the icon type determined in Fig. 53(f) as the final form. For example, if the icon type determined in Fig. 53(f) is "blue", a scenario is selected in which "white" is displayed when the number image starts to be displayed and changes to "blue" before the target image is reached, with "30/100", and a scenario is selected in which the number image starts to be displayed in "blue" from the beginning and does not change thereafter until the target image is reached, with "70/100".

In addition, if the icon type determined in FIG. 53(f) is "yellow", a scenario in which "white" is displayed when the number image starts to be displayed and changes to "yellow" before the target image is reached is selected in "10/100", a scenario in which "blue" is displayed when the number image starts to be displayed and changes to "yellow" before the target image is reached is selected in "20/100", and a scenario in which "yellow" number images are displayed from the beginning and do not change thereafter until the target image is reached is selected in "70/100".

For ease of explanation, other tables will be omitted, but tables corresponding to the icon types "green," "purple," and "red" are stored, and scenarios are determined in the same manner as for "blue" and "yellow" described above.

FIG. 54(i) is an addition time message table.
The message table for addition is a table for determining an effect image (see FIG. 50(e)) to be displayed in front of the target image when an addition is performed. For example, when "+5" is added, "GOOD" is selected as the effect image at "100/100", when "+7" is added, "PERFECT" is selected as the effect image at "100/100", when "+10" is added, "GREAT" is selected as the effect image at "100/100", and when "+20" is added, "MARVELOUS" is selected as the effect image at "100/100". Note that the selection ratio is merely an example, and for example, when "+5" is added, "GOOD" is likely to be selected, and other images may also be selected. The same applies to "+7", "+10", and "+20".

FIG. 54(j) is a button determination table.
The button determination table is a table for determining the type of button in the jackpot judgment executed in the 9th round. The button types include "button (green)", "button (red)", and "lever", and one of the button types is selected according to the final % in FIG. 52(b). Note that "button (green)" refers to a mode in which the effect button 14 is operated and the LED of the effect button 14 and the effect button image are displayed in green, "button (red)" refers to a mode in which the effect button 14 is operated and the LED of the effect button 14 and the effect button image are displayed in red, and "lever" refers to a mode in which the effect lever 15 is operated and the lever image is displayed.

If the final percentage is "77%", select the "Button (green)" at "5/100", select the "Button (red)" at "15/100", and select the "Lever" at "80/100".
When the final percentage is "100%, "the "lever" is selected as "100/100" and nothing else is selected.
If the final percentage is "60%", select the "Button (green)" at "80/100", select the "Button (red)" at "15/100", and select the "Lever" at "5/100".
If the final percentage is "70%", select the "Button (Green)" at "70/100", select the "Button (Red)" at "20/100", and select the "Lever" at "10/100".
If the final percentage is "80%", select the "Button (Green)" at "60/100", select the "Button (Red)" at "25/100", and select the "Lever" at "15/100".
If the final percentage is "90%", select the "Button (Green)" at "50/100", select the "Button (Red)" at "30/100", and select the "Lever" at "20/100".

In the button decision table, in the case of "77%" or "100%", the "lever" tends to be selected, while in the other percentages, the "effect button" tends to be selected more than the "lever", and furthermore, in the case of "60%" or "70%", the "button (green)" tends to be selected more than the "button (red)", and in the case of "80%" or "90%", the "button (red)" tends to be selected more easily than in the case of "60%" or "70%". Therefore, in terms of the expected continuation of the RUSH, the relationship is "button (green)" < "button (red)" < "lever", which makes the player want the "button (red)" or "lever" to be executed.

FIG. 54(k) is a table for determining the effects when an over-winning combination occurs.
As mentioned above, the icon effect corresponding to the over win is not executed. On the other hand, the effect of notifying the over win itself is executable, and when the over win occurs, the sound "Yeeshaa!" is selected as "100/100". The table is a table that is commonly used regardless of which mode is selected.

The over-winning performance decision table is referenced during big win 1 play or big win 2 play. In other words, it is not referenced during small win play, and even if the 11th game ball enters the second big win port 32 during a small win play, the over-winning performance is not executed.

The above-mentioned Figs. 52 to 54 are expected to have the following effects.
In the initial percentage, percentages such as "0%" and "100%" that essentially indicate that the game will continue can be displayed. In this way, when the percentage is "0%," the player may have the impression that the game expects the game to continue at first glance, but the RUSH will continue as a result, which can provide an element of surprise and increase the interest in the game. In addition, when the percentage is "0%," the number of additions increases depending on the final percentage (the range of change in the numerical value also increases), so the player can enjoy the icon presentation and the RUSH will continue as a result, which can give the player a great sense of satisfaction. On the other hand, when the percentage is "100%," the player may not add the number of points by the icon presentation, but the visual impression (the impression that there is no upper limit beyond 100) and the sense of incongruity that the numerical value does not change give the player the impression that the RUSH will continue, which can give the player a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, when the initial percentage is displayed as "0%" or "100%", effects that confirm the continuation of the RUSH (for example, RUSH CONTINUES!) are not executed in conjunction with these displays. This makes it possible to prevent players who are looking forward to the icon effects that follow from being informed of the results in advance (preventing players from seeing the results in advance), and allows them to enjoy the icon effects purely.

In addition, other than "0%" and "100%", the higher the initial % value, the higher the continuation expectation, and the lower the value, the lower the continuation expectation. This makes it desirable to display as high a value as possible as the initial %, while suggesting the expectation level according to the value, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy to understand even for players who are inexperienced at gaming.

In the final percentage, it is possible to display percentages such as "77%" or "100%" that essentially indicate that the reel will continue. This allows the player to focus on what value will be added, improving interest in the game. For example, when it is "10%, the player will desire a larger value to be added, and when it is "70%, the player will desire a smaller value (e.g., +7%) to be added rather than a larger value (e.g., +20%). This avoids a monotonous presentation in which only a large value needs to be added, improving interest in the game.

In addition, for the final percentage, "77%" can only be selected when special symbol D or special symbol F (special symbols that can continue the RUSH) has been determined, while "80%" and "90%" can also be selected when special symbol G (special symbol that ends the RUSH) is selected. Therefore, when "77%" is displayed, the expectation of the RUSH continuing is higher than when "80%" or "90%" is displayed. In other words, when "77%" is displayed, the possibility (expectation) of a small win game to a big win 2 game being played in succession is higher. This avoids the monotonous rule that the higher the final percentage, the higher the expectation, and adds an element of surprise, further increasing interest in the game.

In addition, when "77%" or "100%" is displayed as the final percentage, effects that confirm the continuation of the RUSH (for example, RUSH continues!) are not executed in conjunction with these displays. This makes it possible to prevent players who are looking forward to the jackpot judgment that follows from being informed of the result in advance (preventing players from knowing in advance), and allows them to enjoy the jackpot judgment purely.

In addition, if the initial % is displayed as "100%", the final % will also be "100%" (the initial % will not change). This prevents the initial % from being downgraded, which can cause anxiety to the player.

In addition, other than "77%" and "100%", the higher the Final % number, the higher the expectation of continuation, and the lower the number, the lower the expectation of continuation. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy to understand even for players who are inexperienced at gaming, by suggesting the expectation level according to the number while encouraging players to desire a number as high as possible as the Final % number.

In addition, when adding percentages, if the final percentage is set to "77%," then "+7" is used as a special addition value to make it "77%". This allows you to focus on the added value displayed, since while "+7" may seem like a small addition at first glance, just displaying it essentially confirms that the RUSH will continue.

In addition, for example, as shown in FIG. 53(e), when percentage addition is performed, once "77%" is reached, no further additions are made even if there are subsequent rounds remaining (the same applies to the case of 100%). This prevents values that indicate that the RUSH will continue, such as "77%" or "100%, " from being overwritten (especially when the value is 77%), which would disappoint the player. However, it is permissible to overwrite "77%" to make it "100%".

In addition, even after reaching "77%" or "100%", the icon effect continues, although no more points are added. This prevents the flow of the icon effect ending (at the end of the 8th round) and the jackpot judgment (9th round) from being disrupted, and prevents players from losing interest in the effect or losing interest due to a long gap between the end of the icon effect and the start of the jackpot judgment.

In addition, after reaching "77%" or "100%," a "rainbow" icon type can be displayed. This prevents the icon presentation where no addition is made from being dull, and by displaying something special like a "rainbow," it is possible to create a sense of excitement that the continuation of the RUSH is confirmed, increasing interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 53(e), in the case of "77%" (as in the case of 100%), there are multiple rounds in which the continuation of the RUSH is confirmed (rounds where 77% is reached). This allows attention to be drawn to each individual round, making the jackpot gameplay more enjoyable.

In addition, each percentage addition table has 16 addition patterns. This prevents players from easily guessing what the final percentage will be based on the addition situation, allowing players to enjoy the icon presentation purely.

In addition, multiple colors are provided as icon types, and the higher the added value, the easier it is to select "green," "purple," or "red." This draws the player's attention to what color is displayed as the icon (number image), enhancing interest in the game. The relationship (color rules) of expected added value, such as "white" < "blue" < "green" < "red," is the same as the color rules in the reserved read-ahead presentation described above. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand, without breaking the color rules even with different presentations.

In addition, the icons (number images) are now able to change from when they first appear until they reach the target image. This prevents players from becoming discouraged even if an icon with a low expected winning rate is displayed at the start of a round.

When addition is being performed, an addition message is displayed after the icon (number image) overlaps the target image, and then the added value is notified. The addition message is also designed to be easy to select depending on the added value. This makes it easy to predict the added value when the addition message is displayed, making the addition process enjoyable.

In addition, in the addition icon position determination table, "white" and "blue" when adding are more likely to be displayed in the early counts (counts 2-3), "yellow" and "green" when adding are more likely to be displayed in the middle counts (counts 4-6), "purple" when adding are more likely to be displayed in the latter counts (counts 5-9), and "red" when adding are more likely to be displayed in the final counts (counts 7-8). The reason for this tendency is that, as mentioned above, at the start of the second round, the number images 1-5 are visible, and when the number images 6-10 in the third to seventh rounds have been consumed, the number images 1-5 of the next round become visible, so in order to make the latter number images 6-10 visible, it is necessary to make the ball enter the large prize opening. Therefore, by making it easier to display icons with a high expectation of addition in the latter number images 6-10, it is possible to stimulate the desire to enter the large prize opening. This allows you to enjoy the jackpot gameplay.

Also, in the addition icon position determination table, no icons are placed at counts 1 and 10 when addition is performed. The reason for this is that, as mentioned above, for special patterns D, F, and G (when icon effects can be performed), the interval between rounds is set to 0.5 seconds, which allows for fast completion, but makes it difficult to tell the boundary between the previous round and the next round, and as a result, if an addition is performed at count 1 or 10, it becomes difficult to tell whether the addition was made at count 10 of the previous round or at count 1 of the next round. Therefore, by not placing an icon at count 1 or 10 when addition is performed, it is possible to clarify in which round the addition was made, and prevent the excitement of the effect from being lost.

In addition, in the button determination table, if the final % is "77%", the "lever" is made easier to select, and the "button (green)" and "button (red)" are also selectable, while if the final % is "100%", only the "lever" is selected. This allows the player to operate the effect lever 15 as much as possible when the continuation of the RUSH is essentially confirmed, further increasing the sense of satisfaction. Also, at "77%," where the apparent confirmation factor is lower than "100%," the "button (green)" and "button (red)" are also selectable, so that the excitement and suspense can be maintained until the judgment during the jackpot is executed and the continuation of the RUSH is announced.

In addition, it is easier to select the "button (green)" at "60%" or "70%" than at "80%" or "90%," and it is easier to select the "button (red)" or "lever" at "80%" or "90%" than at "60%" or "70%." This allows you to make judgments (buttons) during a jackpot that are in line with the visual numbers, and by maintaining a balance in the presentation, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, although no icon effects are performed in response to an over win, the over win itself is notified by the over win determination table, so the player can be informed of the over win without disrupting the icon effects, providing a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, the over-winning effects can be performed during Big Hit 1 and Big Hit 2 play, but are not performed during small hit play. This prevents notifications for the transition to Big Hit 2 play from becoming difficult to understand.

Next, the title table in FIG. 55(l) and the revival pattern determination table in FIG. 55(m) will be described.
The title table is a table that defines the titles to be displayed in the end ED (see FIG. 51(i)), and is stored in the sub-ROM 202. A "title" is game result information that is displayed in association with the acquired SCORE; for example, if the expected acquired SCORE is "2100" or more, the title "Initial Speed Gachagachaman" is displayed in the end ED, and if the expected acquired SCORE is "3600" or more, the title "Accelerating Gachagachaman" is displayed in the end ED. The number of consecutive wins indicates the number of times that a jackpot 1 play or a jackpot 2 play has been executed at the second starting port 22. For example, if a player wins on special pattern A and transitions to a time-saving play state, and then wins on special pattern G and transitions to a normal play state, the number of consecutive wins will be "1". In this case, the jackpot 1 play with special pattern A will be 4 rounds x 150 balls (number of balls acquired per round), which is "600", and the small jackpot play to jackpot 2 play with special pattern G will be a total of 10 rounds x 150 balls (number of balls acquired per round), which is "1500". Therefore, the expected SCORE is "600" + "1500", which is "2100".

The counter in the sub-RAM 203 mentioned above is updated from the start of the RUSH to the end of the RUSH due to the winning of the special symbol G, and when displaying a title, the counter value is referenced and the corresponding title is selected and displayed.

Common to all modes means that even if the mode is mode A when the special symbol G that ends the RUSH is won, if the expected SCORE is "2100", the title 1 "Hatsusoku no Gachagachaman" will be displayed, and even if the mode is mode B when the special symbol G that ends the RUSH is won, if the expected SCORE is "2100", the title 1 "Hatsusoku no Gachagachaman" will be displayed. In other words, the title is displayed in common regardless of which mode is selected.

The title displayed may be different for each mode. For example, even if the expected SCORE is the same, such as "2100," different titles may be displayed in mode A and mode B. This can increase motivation to select a mode.

The title display changes color depending on the expected acquisition SCORE value. For example, title 1 will be displayed in green as "Speedy Gachagachaman", title 3 will be displayed in red as "Speedy Gachagachaman", and title 7 will be displayed in gold as "Quick Gachagachaman", so the higher the expected acquisition SCORE value, the more decorative the title will be. Note that the title table lists titles 1 through 8, but there are multiple titles from title 8 onwards, and all titles are written as "XX Gachagachaman", with only the "XX" part differing. Also, gold is the highest color displayed, and there are no colors higher than gold (titles 7 and above are gold).

Although not shown in the title table, when the acquired SCORE reaches "99999", the acquired SCORE will not be updated and displayed even if the jackpot 1 or jackpot 2 game is played thereafter, so the title display will continue to display the title corresponding to the acquired SCORE of "99999". For example, if "Speedy Gachagachaman" can be displayed at "99999", then in the end ending after one jackpot 2 game is played in the "99999" state, "Speedy Gachagachaman" will be displayed, and in the end ending after two jackpot 2 games are played in the "99999" state, "Speedy Gachagachaman" will be displayed. This stops updating the title display when the update display of the acquired SCORE such as "99999" stops, making it easier for the player to understand that the acquired SCORE and title display have reached the limit (upper limit), giving the player an even greater sense of accomplishment. In addition, developers no longer need to prepare an infinite number of title displays, reducing development labor and data volume. The title "Super Speed Gachagachaman" may be positioned as a title displayed at "90000" or above, or as a title displayed at "99999" (only).

The title may be displayed in association with the number of consecutive wins. However, there is a possibility that the acquired SCORE will not be commensurate with the number of consecutive wins, for example, if the player forgets to place the game ball in the big prize slot. In such a situation, displaying a title linked to the number of consecutive wins may cause discomfort to the player. Therefore, it is preferable to link the title to the expected acquired SCORE.

The titles include revival titles, and in this embodiment, these include "Revival Title 1" and "Revival Title 2". Revival titles are displayed in the end ending, and are displayed in the same display position as Title 1 and the like. For example, Figure 51 (k) shows the display mode of "Revival Title 1" in the end ending, and is displayed in approximately the same form as the display mode of Title 1 in Figure 51 (i). Therefore, at first glance, it is difficult to notice that the display mode in Figure 51 (k) is suggesting a revival.

The revival title can also be displayed regardless of which mode is selected, and can be displayed when revival is selected during result display in Figure 55 (m) (either revival title 1 or 2 is selected in a predetermined allocation). The color of the letters that make up the revival title is gold, and they are as decorative as titles 7 and onwards (highly decorative). For example, if the expected SCORE is "2100" but a gold title (revival title) is displayed, the player is likely to feel uncomfortable, and this sense of discomfort is itself an indication of revival, which can lead to increased interest in the game.

The revival titles are decorated in the same way as titles 7 and onwards (the most decorative gold colour), but they are not limited to this and may be displayed in an even more decorative colour (rainbow colours, for example). This can make it easier to notice that a revival suggestion is being made.

In the present embodiment, in the end ED, the revival is suggested by the title display, and the revival is not suggested by other game result information, but this is not limited to this, and the revival may be suggested using other game result information. For example, in the end ED of FIG. 51(k), the RUSH measurement image 26ti, the score image 26sc, the number of wins image 26wi, the title image 26sg, and the ally character chaA are displayed. Of these, the RUSH measurement image 26ti may be used to suggest revival. For example, the revival may be suggested by displaying something unnatural such as "02:77" or "02:VV". The revival may be suggested using the score image 26sc. For example, the revival may be suggested by displaying something unnatural such as "SCORE???????". The revival suggestions, including the suggestion by the title, may be executed only one of them, or two or more may be executed simultaneously.

On the other hand, no revival suggestions will be made by the win count image 26wi or ally character chaA. This prevents the area the player must focus on from becoming too wide, causing the player to miss the revival suggestion even though it is being made.

Note that it may be possible for the victory count image 26wi or ally character chaA to suggest a revival, but in this case, it is preferable not to suggest a revival using the rush measurement image 26ti or score image 26sc, so that the areas that the player must pay attention to are not too wide.

In the title table, for title 1, the expected SCORE is "600" + "1500", which is "2100", and "1500" is added thereafter. For example, if the expected SCORE is "2100" and a "left hit" is performed, a special pattern A is hit, and then a jackpot 2 play with special pattern F is executed once, the expected SCORE becomes "2100" + "600" + "1500" = "4200". If the end ED is executed in such a situation, title 2 can be displayed. In other words, even if a special pattern hit is executed based on a ball entering the first starting hole 21 in the middle, the number of balls won during that jackpot 1 play can be included in the acquired SCORE, and the title corresponding to the acquired SCORE can be displayed. This allows players to increase their SCORE even if they accidentally hit the special prize by "hitting left," giving them a sense of satisfaction.

As mentioned in the example where Title 2 is displayed when the expected SCORE is "4200", Titles can be displayed even if an exceptional jackpot game is played, such as Title 1 if the expected SCORE is "0-3599", Title 2 if the expected SCORE is "3600-5099", Title 3 if the expected SCORE is "5100-6599", etc. In other words, even if a jackpot game is played but the expected SCORE is "0" (when no wins are made), Title 1 can still be displayed.

Next, (m) the revival pattern determination table is a table for notifying the continuation of the RUSH at the end ED when the continuation of the RUSH has been confirmed but has not been notified until the end ED for presentation reasons, and is stored in the sub-ROM 202. As described in the explanation of FIG. 51, the continuation notification at the end ED includes revival at the start of the ending and revival while the result is being displayed. The selection ratio of these revivals changes depending on the number of consecutive wins.

For example, at the end of a two-game winning streak, revival at the beginning of the ending is selected as "90/100," and revival during the result display is selected as "10/100."
At the end of a three-game winning streak, select "80/100" for revival at the beginning of the ending, and "20/100" for revival while the results are displayed.
At the end of a four-game winning streak, select "70/100" for revival at the beginning of the ending, and "30/100" for revival while the results are displayed.
At the end of a five-game winning streak, select "60/100" for revival at the beginning of the ending, and "40/100" for revival while the results are displayed.
At the end of a six-game winning streak, select "50/100" for revival at the beginning of the ending, and select "50/100" for revival while the results are displayed.
At the end of a seven-game winning streak, revival at the beginning of the ending is chosen at "40/100," and revival while the results are displayed is chosen at "60/100." The more consecutive wins there are, the more likely the player is to select "revival while the results are displayed."

The selection rate for the revival pattern may be changed as appropriate, may be constant regardless of the number of consecutive wins, there may be revival patterns that are easier to select for each number of consecutive wins, or the more consecutive wins there are, the easier it may be to select revival at the start of the ending.

In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 55(n), when revival is selected during result display, either revival title 1 or revival title 2 is selected, and title 1 etc. is not selectable. In other words, when revival is selected during result display, revival title 1 or revival title 2 is always displayed.
In addition, without being limited to this, even if revival is selected during the result display, a title (such as title 1) corresponding to the expected acquired SCORE may be displayed, and then the revival performance shown in Figure 51 (l) may be executed.

Figure 55 (o) shows the revival route, and in the case of special pattern D, or in the case of mode A where the final % is "77%" or "100%", end ED revival is not executed, and the continuation of the RUSH is always announced in the judgment during the jackpot in the 9th round. On the other hand, in the case of mode A where the final % is other than "77%" or "100%", end ED revival may be executed (only if special pattern F is determined) (the allocation of whether to announce continuation in the judgment during the jackpot or in the end ED may be arbitrary). Also, in the case of mode B where a failure is announced in the 9th round, or in mode C where a defeat is announced in the 9th round, end ED revival may be executed (only if special pattern F is determined) (the allocation of whether to announce continuation in the judgment during the jackpot or in the end ED may be arbitrary).

In FIG. 55, the following effects can be expected.
In the title table, the title is displayed in association with the acquired SCORE. This allows the player to feel a sense of satisfaction since the title displayed corresponds to the actually acquired SCORE.

The title display content changes each time a jackpot 1 game or jackpot 2 game is played by having the game ball enter the second starting hole 22. For example, when a jackpot 1 game or jackpot 2 game is played by having the ball enter the second starting hole 22, "1500" is added to the SCORE, and the title is changed by adding "1500". This means that a different title may be displayed each time a RUSH is played, which can increase motivation to play.

In addition, the titles are displayed in accordance with the acquired SCORE, and are not displayed in accordance with the number of consecutive wins. This prevents a situation in which a higher title is displayed despite an extremely low acquired SCORE due to not allowing the game ball to enter the big prize slot (for example, displaying "Fastest Gachagachaman" when the acquired SCORE is around 3000).

In addition, the titles are displayed in a more decorative manner (green < red < gold) as the acquired SCORE increases. This gives a sense of satisfaction to players who achieve a high acquired SCORE.

In addition, the titles shown in FIG. 55 are displayed regardless of whether mode A, B, or C is selected. For example, if mode A is selected and the acquired SCORE is "2100," or if mode C is selected and the acquired SCORE is "2100," "Initial Gachagachaman" is displayed in both cases. This prevents situations where a title cannot be obtained depending on the mode, and prevents the player from having to go through the trouble of changing modes in order to obtain a title. Furthermore, when displaying a title, there is no need to determine which mode was selected; instead, a simple process is used in which only the acquired SCORE is displayed, simplifying the control process.

In addition, revived titles are now displayed in the same position as titles 1 and 2. This makes it interesting to see what the titles are, as at first glance they look no different to titles 1 and 2, and you have to take a closer look to see what they are.

In addition, the title display is now in the same highly decorative color (gold) as titles 7 and above. This will prevent situations where players don't notice that a revival suggestion is being made.

In addition, the revival title shown in FIG. 55 is displayed regardless of whether mode A, B, or C is selected. For example, whether mode A or C is selected, if revival is selected during the result display, the "Resurrected Gachagachaman" can be displayed. This prevents situations where the revival title cannot be obtained depending on the mode, and prevents the player from being required to perform troublesome operations such as changing modes in order to obtain the revival title. Furthermore, there is no need to determine which mode was selected when displaying the revival title, simplifying the control process.

In addition, in the final ending, there are some that suggest revival (revival title) and some that do not (rush measurement image 26ti, score image 26sc, number of wins image 26wi, ally character chaA). This prevents the area that the player needs to focus on from becoming too wide and causing them to miss the revival hint.

In addition, in the revival pattern determination table, the revival pattern is selected in accordance with the number of consecutive wins. In particular, the more consecutive wins there are, the more likely it is that revival during the result display will be selected rather than revival at the beginning of the ending. This allows the excitement to be maintained until the end of the ending (the 9th second into the ending where the choice between revival or ending branches out) as the number of consecutive wins increases, increasing interest in the game.

Furthermore, if it is possible to select not only the revived title but also the title 1 and others when reviving while the results are being displayed, the opportunities to see a variety of titles can be increased, providing players with a sense of satisfaction. In particular, achieving a long streak is statistically not an easy feat, and titles that can only be seen by achieving a long streak are valuable to players. Increasing the opportunities to see such titles can further increase the sense of satisfaction of players who achieve a long streak.

Figure 56 is a diagram showing the mode selection presentation for each mode, Figure 57 is a diagram showing the presentation for each mode during the time-saving game state (presentation during RUSH), and Figure 58 is a diagram showing the presentation status monitoring process related to mode selection.
As mentioned above, during the RUSH in this embodiment, there are Mode A (icon presentation), Mode B (post-notification), and Mode C (battle announcement). Of these, the icon presentation is as described in FIG. 50 and the like, and the post-notification and battle announcement are modes in which the continuation of the RUSH can be known either in the 9th round or the end ending. That is, in the icon presentation of Mode A, the initial % is "100%" in the 2nd round, and the continuation suggestion image 26ks may be "77%" or "100%" from the 3rd round onwards, and the continuation of the RUSH is substantially confirmed (the continuation of the RUSH can be substantially known), but the post-notification and battle announcement are configured to allow the continuation of the RUSH to be known either in the 9th round or the end ending, and the continuation of the RUSH cannot be substantially known in the 2nd to 8th rounds. In addition, when a continuous notification is made, if it is a later notification, a presentation is executed in which a "V" image is obtained in the 9th round, and if it is a battle notification, a presentation is executed in which an ally character wins against an enemy character in the 9th round.

In addition, it is possible for both post-notification and battle notification to suggest continuation from round 2 to round 8. For example, for post-notification, a suggestion to continue may be made by displaying an image suggesting the acquisition of a "V" image, and for battle notification, a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character fight is executed from round 2 to round 8, and a suggestion to continue may be made by showing which side is in the lead.

In other words, in the case of Mode A, as shown in Figure 56, in the second round, mode selection is only possible when the displayed initial % is "100%." On the other hand, as mentioned above, even if the initial % is "0%," the continuation of RUSH is essentially confirmed, but in the case of "0%," the apparent confirmation factor is lower than in the case of "100%," so mode selection is not possible.

In addition, in rounds 3 to 8, if "77%" or "100%" (including when the initial % is 100%) is reached, it is possible to select a mode after reaching that point. However, apart from these examples, mode selection is not possible in rounds 2 to 8, and for example, even if the final % is "90%," mode selection is not possible.

Then, when a jackpot judgment is made in the 9th round and it is announced that the RUSH will continue, mode selection becomes possible in the 10th round. In other words, when it is effectively confirmed that the RUSH will continue, mode selection is possible even in rounds 2 to 8, but if it is not effectively confirmed that the RUSH will continue, mode selection is not possible in rounds 2 to 8. Also, mode selection is possible in a situation where it has been confirmed that the RUSH will continue (round 10). Note that if revival at the start of the ending or revival while the results are displayed is selected, mode selection is not possible in round 10.

Next, for Mode B (post-announcement) and Mode C (battle announcement), mode selection is not possible from round 2 to round 8 regardless of the presentation situation (for example, friendly characters are dominant in Mode C). When a jackpot judgment is made in round 9 and it is announced that the RUSH will continue, mode selection becomes possible in round 10. In other words, mode selection is possible in a situation where the continuation of the RUSH has been definitely announced (round 10). In other words, depending on the mode, the timing at which mode selection can be made is variable (Mode A) or unchanging (Modes B and C). Note that if revival at the start of the ending or revival while the results are displayed is selected, mode selection is not possible in round 10.

56(a) and (b) show an example of a case where mode selection is possible in mode A. For example, it is assumed that the continuation suggestion image 26ks becomes "77%" as a result of addition in the third round. Specifically, after "+7%" is displayed in (a), it moves to the continuation suggestion image 26ks and becomes "77%". Then, in (b), a new mode changeable image 26mh is displayed on the image display device 26. At this time, the operation of the cross key button 16 (left and right) is also enabled, and when the player operates the left and right of the cross key button 16, the mode is switched in sequence between mode A, mode B, and mode C, and selection operation is possible until the operation effective time related to mode selection has elapsed. Then, when the operation effective time has elapsed, the mode selected at that time is determined. In other words, it differs from the mode selection method described in FIG. 48 in that the effect button 14 is not pressed. This makes it possible to prevent the pressing of the effect button 14 related to mode selection from being mistaken for a judgment during a big win.

Similarly, Fig. 56(a') and (b') show an example of a case where mode selection is possible in mode B, and a new mode change possible image 26mh is displayed on the image display device 26 in the 10th round. The rest is the same as Fig. 56(a) and (b).

The mode changeable image 26mh has a display size equal to that of the score image 26sc, is not displayed in a conspicuous manner (size, color), and does not loudly notify the user that mode selection is now possible when the image starts to be displayed; it is simply displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 56(b) or (b').

The mode is reflected not only during jackpot play, but also during time-saving play. For example, Fig. 57 (a1) and (a2) show the state during the time-saving play state of mode A, Fig. 57 (b1) and (b2) show the state during the time-saving play state of mode B, and Fig. 57 (c1) and (c2) show the state during the time-saving play state of mode C.

In other words, if mode A is selected, icon effects will be executed during jackpot play and a straight road background will be displayed during time-saving play, if mode B is selected, post-notification will be executed during jackpot play and a garage background will be displayed during time-saving play, if mode C is selected, a battle announcement will be executed during jackpot play and a mountain background will be displayed during time-saving play.

As shown in Figure 7, during the time-saving play state, the time varies by one second in either case, and since the player is set to win either a special prize or a small prize, as soon as the time-saving play state is entered, for example, "777" is displayed as a confirmed number, and the player is again set to play big prize 1, or small prize to big prize 2. Therefore, no big prize advance notice is performed in the background during the time-saving play state, and the background during the time-saving play state is not that important to the player. Therefore, mode selection is not possible during the time-saving play state, and mode selection is positioned as something that is performed during a big prize play to select the notification method for the next big prize play (the notification method for whether the RUSH continues or not).

In other words, when a mode is selected, the player can at least play the next big win in the selected mode, preventing a situation in which the degree of reflection is low despite the mode selection, which discourages the player from selecting a mode.

When the special pattern D or special pattern F has been determined and the continuation of the RUSH has been confirmed, in mode A, the mode change possible image 26mh may be displayed during or before the start of the icon performance, and in modes B and C, the mode change possible image 26mh may be displayed before the judgment during the big win. In this way, the sudden display of the mode change possible image 26mh can make the player aware that there is a high possibility of the RUSH continuing, and then the player can proceed with the icon performance, etc. Also, in the end ED, it may be teased as to whether or not the mode change possible image 26mh will be displayed, and if it is displayed, it may be a continuation notification, and if it is not displayed, it may be a non-continuation notification.

Next, FIG. 58 shows the performance status monitoring process, which is a subroutine of step S305 in FIG. 27. The performance status monitoring process monitors the performance status and enables mode selection if the selection conditions are met, and is a control process for realizing FIG. 56.

(Step 305-1)
In step S305-1, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not the jackpot 1 game is in progress. If the jackpot 1 game is in progress, the process proceeds to step S305-2. If the jackpot 1 game is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S305-4.

(Step 305-2)
In step S305-2, the sub-CPU 201 judges whether or not a RUSH acquisition has been notified. For example, in the case of the special symbol A, it judges whether or not a RUSH transition notification has been executed in the 3rd round, and in the case of the special symbol D, it judges whether or not a RUSH transition notification has been executed in the 9th round. If a RUSH acquisition notification has been executed, the process proceeds to step S305-3, and if a RUSH acquisition notification has not been executed, the process proceeds to step S306 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step 305-3)
In step S305-3, the sub-CPU 201 executes a mode selection enabling process. Specifically, the operation using the cross key button 16 is enabled to allow the player to select a mode. The enabling process continues until the upper limit round is over. When the process ends, the process proceeds to step S306 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step 305-4)
In step S305-4, the sub-CPU 201 judges whether or not the jackpot 2 is being played. If the jackpot 2 is being played, the process proceeds to step S305-5. If the jackpot 2 is not being played, the process proceeds to step S306 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step 305-5)
In step S305-5, the sub-CPU 201 judges whether the RUSH continuation has been notified, whether mode A has been selected and 77% has been reached, or whether mode A has been selected and 100% has been reached. If any of these conditions are met, the process proceeds to step 305-6, and if none of these conditions are met, the process proceeds to step S306 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step 305-6)
In step S305-6, the sub-CPU 201 executes a mode selection enabling process. Specifically, the operation using the cross key button 16 is enabled to allow the player to select a mode. The enabling process continues until the upper limit round is over. When the process ends, the process proceeds to step S306 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

The following effects can be expected from the above-mentioned FIGS. 56 to 58.
In mode A, once the continuation of the RUSH is confirmed, mode selection is possible (the period during which the mode can be selected can be brought forward), while in modes B and C, the period is fixed at 10 rounds. This allows the time after the continuation of the RUSH is confirmed to be effectively utilized when mode A is selected (the degree of freedom in mode selection can be increased), and prevents the player from becoming bored. On the other hand, in modes B and C, the mode selection is fixed at 10 rounds, so that in mode C, for example, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to concentrate on the content of the battle announcement.

In addition, it is now possible to select a mode after it has been confirmed that the RUSH will continue, or after a notification that the RUSH will continue has been made. This prevents, for example, when mode A is selected, the mode change possible image 26mh from being displayed even though the icon presentation is in the middle of being displayed, and the result of the icon presentation being known in advance. Similarly, for example, when mode B is selected, the mode change possible image 26mh from being displayed before the jackpot judgment, and the result of the jackpot judgment being known in advance.

Also, it is now possible to select a mode when at least the next small win is guaranteed. This allows players to play in the RUSH mode for a certain period of time while enjoying a sense of superiority, further increasing the player's interest in the game.

The mode change possible image 26mh is also not displayed in a conspicuous manner or in a manner that loudly notifies the user that a mode change is possible. This prevents the user from being distracted by the image and missing other effects.

For example, in mode A, after displaying "77%", the mode change possible image 26mh is displayed. This means that the display of the mode change possible image 26mh (e.g., an image encouraging an operation) essentially indicates that the RUSH will continue, and it can attract the player's attention in a way that goes beyond simply being an image encouraging an operation.

In addition, the presentation status monitoring process monitors the presentation status before executing the mode selection activation process. This essentially allows mode selection to be executed without delay after the continuation of the RUSH has been confirmed or after a notification of the continuation of the RUSH has been issued, providing the player with an even greater sense of satisfaction.

59 and 60 are schematic diagrams relating to the measurement effect during RUSH (the effect of displaying the above-mentioned measurement image 26ti during RUSH).
In case 1, the jackpot 1 game (special symbol A) is executed at timing (a), and when the jackpot 1 game ends at timing (b), the time-saving game state is entered. At this time, the counter (sub-RAM 203) of the RUSH timer starts measuring, and the RUSH measurement image 26ti is displayed (updated display) on the image display device 26.

Then, when a small win is won at timing (c) and the Big Win 2 game (special symbol F) is executed, the time-saving game state is turned OFF. Meanwhile, the RUSH timer counter (sub-RAM 203) continues to measure, and the RUSH measurement image 26ti continues to be updated. Then, when the Big Win 2 game ends at timing (d), the time-saving game state is resumed. Here too, the RUSH timer counter (sub-RAM 203) continues to measure, and the RUSH measurement image 26ti continues to be updated.

Then, when a small win is won at timing (e) and the big win 2 game (special symbol F) is executed, the time-saving game state is turned OFF. Here too, the RUSH timer counter (sub-RAM 203) continues to measure, and the RUSH measurement image 26ti continues to be updated. Then, when the big win 2 game ends at timing (f), the time-saving game state is resumed. Here too, the RUSH timer counter (sub-RAM 203) continues to measure, and the RUSH measurement image 26ti continues to be updated. At timing (f), the player does not shoot a game ball, and the demo performance is started. Even when the demo performance starts, the RUSH timer counter (sub-RAM 203) continues to measure, and the RUSH measurement image 26ti continues to be updated.

Then, when a small win is won at timing (g) and the big win 2 game (special symbol G) is executed, the time-saving game state is turned OFF. Here too, the measurement of the RUSH timer counter (sub-RAM 203) and the update display of the RUSH measurement image 26ti continue, but since the special symbol G corresponds to the normal game state, when the big win 2 game ends at timing (h), the measurement of the RUSH timer counter (sub-RAM 203) is stopped and the measured time at that time is displayed in the end ED.
In this way, the characteristic of case 1 is that measurement and update display continue even if a demo performance is executed during measurement.

In case 2, a jackpot 1 game (special symbol A) is executed at timing (a), and when the jackpot 1 game ends at timing (b), the game enters a time-saving game state. At this time, the counter (sub-RAM 203) of the RUSH timer starts measuring, and the RUSH measurement image 26ti is displayed (updated display) on the image display device 26.

Then, when a small win occurs at timing (c) and the big win 2 game (special symbol F) is executed, the time-saving game state is turned OFF. Meanwhile, the counter of the RUSH timer (sub-RAM 203) continues to measure, and the display of the measurement image 26ti during the RUSH continues to be updated. Then, when the big win 2 game ends at timing (d), the time-saving game state is resumed. Here too, the counter of the RUSH timer (sub-RAM 203) continues to measure, and the display of the measurement image 26ti during the RUSH continues to be updated. Then, in this time-saving game state, the player hits the ball with his left hand, causing the game ball to enter the first starting hole 21.

When the game ball is put into the first starting hole 21, a special winning occurs, and the jackpot 1 game is executed from timing (e), the time-saving game state is turned OFF, the measurement of the RUSH timer counter (sub-RAM 203) is suspended, and the update display of the RUSH measurement image 26ti is also suspended (not displayed). Then, from timing (f) when the jackpot 1 game ends, the measurement of the RUSH timer counter (sub-RAM 203) and the update display of the RUSH measurement image 26ti are resumed. The rest is the same as in case 1, so the explanation will be omitted.
In this way, when a jackpot game is played during measurement, the characteristic of Case 2 is that measurement and update display are interrupted.

In case 3, the jackpot 1 game (special symbol A) is executed at timing (a), and when the jackpot 1 game ends at timing (b), the time-saving game state is entered. At this time, the counter (sub-RAM 203) of the RUSH timer starts measuring, and the RUSH measurement image 26ti is displayed (updated display) on the image display device 26.

Timings (c) to (e) are the same as in Case 1, so a description will be omitted. Subsequent timings (f) to (g) indicate the execution of the end ED, and a revival is performed at the start of the ending, or while the results are being displayed. In these (f) to (g), the update and display of the RUSH measurement image 26ti is suspended, but the counter (sub-RAM 203) of the RUSH timer continues to measure. As a result, in the end ED, the time (RUSH measurement image 26ti) paused at timing (f) is displayed in the results.

Then, at timing (g), the game enters the time-saving game state again, and the update and display of the RUSH measurement image 26ti is resumed. In this case, the value of the RUSH timer counter (sub-RAM 203) at timing (g) is referenced and the referenced value is displayed. Subsequent steps (h) and (i) are the same as (g) and (h) in case 1, and therefore will not be described here.
In this way, when the end ED is executed during measurement, the characteristic of Case 3 is that the measurement continues and the update display is interrupted.

In case 4, the jackpot 1 game (special symbol A) is executed at timing (a), and when the jackpot 1 game ends at timing (b), the time-saving game state is entered. At this time, the counter (sub-RAM 203) of the RUSH timer starts measuring, and the RUSH measurement image 26ti is displayed (updated display) on the image display device 26.

The timings (c) to (e) are the same as those in case 1, and therefore the explanations are omitted. At the following timing (e), the player hits the ball with his left hand and causes the ball to enter the first starting hole 21. However, unlike case 2, the special symbol does not win, but rather it is a special symbol miss. In this case, at the timings (e) to (f), the symbol variation game of the special symbol 1 is executed, but during this time, the measurement of the counter (sub-RAM 203) of the RUSH timer and the update display of the RUSH measurement image 26ti continue. The following (g) and (h) are the same as those in case 1, and therefore the explanations are omitted.
In this way, when a pattern changing game corresponding to special pattern 1 is executed during measurement, the measurement continues and the update display also continues, which is a feature of case 4.

The above-mentioned Figs. 59 and 60 are expected to have the following effects.
Even if a demo performance is executed during the time-saving game state, the measurement and update display are continued. This makes it possible to display the RUSH stay time including the execution of the demo performance, and allows the player to recognize the accurate RUSH stay time. In addition, it is no longer necessary to determine whether the demo performance has started and then interrupt the measurement and update display, thereby simplifying the control process.

In addition, if a jackpot game is played during measurement, the measurement and update display are suspended. This makes it possible to exclude exceptional jackpot games and display the time spent purely in a series of RUSHes. Also, by suspending the update display, it is possible to inform the player that a suboptimal game is being played.

In addition, if the end ending is executed during measurement, the measurement continues and the update display is suspended. When the update display is resumed, it is resumed by referring to the value of the counter (sub-RAM 203) of the RUSH timer that was continuing to measure. This prevents the update display from continuing with the end ending result, which would give the player a strange feeling, and also prevents the player from feeling strange when the display is resumed by taking into account the time that was interrupted.

In addition, if a symbol-changing game that corresponds to special symbol 1 is executed during measurement, measurement will continue and the update display will also continue. This allows for control such as uniform measurement during the time-saving game mode, simplifying control.

In case 1, the measurement and update display are continued during the demo performance, but they may be interrupted. This makes it possible to display the time during which the game ball is shot into the game area 7, allowing the player to grasp the RUSH duration more precisely.

In case 2, at timings (e) to (f), the measurement and update display are suspended during one big win game, but they may be continued. This can reduce the sense of discomfort felt by the player.
In case 2, the measurement and update display may be continued if the special symbol A is displayed, and the measurement and update display may not be executed (ended) if the special symbol B is displayed. This allows the RUSH-in-progress measurement image 26ti to have an aspect (role) other than time display, thereby expanding the scope of the presentation.

In addition, in case 3, if the end ending is executed during measurement, the measurement continues and the update display is interrupted, but the update display may continue only if a revival performance (revival while the results are displayed) is executed. This allows the revival performance to be executed afterwards if time has not stopped while the results are displayed, so that the measurement image 26ti during the RUSH can have an aspect (role) other than displaying time, expanding the range of performances.

In addition, in case 4, if a symbol-changing game corresponding to special symbol 1 is executed during measurement, the measurement continues and the update display also continues, but the update display may be interrupted. In this way, the update display is interrupted (not displayed), making it possible to inform the player that a suboptimal game is being played.

Other variations are listed below.
The icon presentation may be performed not only when the special patterns D, F, and G are displayed, but also when the special patterns A and B are displayed, or may be performed during a pattern-changing game in the normal game state or the time-saving game state.

The icon effect is updated by adding a percentage, but it can also be updated by subtracting a percentage, or it can be a quantitative display (such as a meter) instead of a percentage, or it can be an effect in which multiple characters gather together (such as continuing when gathered).

The icon presentation is updated by adding a percentage display, but it may also be in a form in which the color of the character panel image, etc. is gradually increased, for example. The character panel image may also be updated to change between "white," "blue," "green," "red," and "gold."

The icon presentation is updated sequentially when a ball lands in the big prize opening, but it may also be updated sequentially when a ball lands in the second start opening 22, or when a ball lands in the normal prize opening 23.

The icon presentation may be updated sequentially by operating the presentation button 14 or presentation lever 15. For example, the presentation may be updated by operating the presentation button 14 a predetermined number of times per round, or the presentation may be updated when the presentation button 14 is pressed at the right time when the icon overlaps the target image.

The winning emphasis effect is executed by the ball entering the first large winning hole 24, but is not limited to this. For example, the winning emphasis effect may be executed by the ball entering the second starting hole 22 or the normal winning hole 23.

In addition, in this embodiment, the specifications are described as a type 1/type 2 mixed machine, but it may be applied to a type with a probability variation state in which the probability variation state loops, or to an ST probability variation type in which the upper limit number of times the pattern change game can be executed in the probability variation state is set. It may also be applied to an enclosed type pachinko game machine in which game balls are not ejected outside the machine.

In addition, in this embodiment, a pachinko game machine has been used as an example for explanation, but the contents described in this embodiment can also be applied to a reel-type game machine (slot machine), a jan-ball game machine, or an arrange-ball game machine.

The details of the means and the like described in the gaming machine will now be described.
The game machine includes an acquisition means (main CPU 101) for acquiring judgment information (random number value for special symbol hit judgment) when an acquisition condition is satisfied (entry of a game ball into the first start hole 21 or the second start hole 22), a judgment means (main CPU 101) for judging whether or not a special game (big win game, small win game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the judgment information, and a performance control means (sub-CPU 201) for controlling the execution of a performance, and the performance control means adds predetermined numerical information (value determined by a % addition table) to first numerical information (initial %, continuation suggestion image 26ks) to derive second numerical information (final %), thereby suggesting the possibility that the special game will be executed, and the second numerical information is a first number (for example, 60%) displayed. a case where a second number greater than the first number (e.g., 90%) is displayed, a case where a third number greater than the first number and less than the second number (e.g., 77%) is displayed, and when the second number is displayed, the special game is more likely to be executed than when the first number is displayed (e.g., in the case of special symbols D and F, 90% is easier to select than 60%, and in the case of special symbol G, 60% is easier to select than 90%), and when the third number is displayed, the special game is more likely to be executed than when the second number is displayed (e.g., 77% is selected only in the case of special symbols D and F and is not selected in the case of special symbol G, but 90% can also be selected in the case of special symbol G).

1 Pachinko game machine 26 Image display device 100 Main control board 200 Performance control board

Claims (1)

an acquisition means for acquiring determination information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
a determination means for determining whether or not a special game advantageous to a player is to be executed based on the determination information;
An advantageous game control means for controlling an advantageous game to which the special game can be transferred after the special game is ended;
A performance control means for controlling the execution of the performance;
An operation means operable by a player ,
The performance control means includes:
By operating the operating means to derive second numerical information which is increased by a predetermined number from the first numerical information, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the advantageous game will be executed,
The second numerical information is
a first number is displayed, a second number greater than the first number is displayed, and a third number greater than the first number and less than the second number is displayed;
When the second number is displayed, the advantageous game is more likely to be executed than when the first number is displayed;
When the third number is displayed, the advantageous game is more likely to be executed than when the second number is displayed;
The performance control means includes:
After deriving the second numerical information, it is possible to notify whether or not the advantageous game is executed by operating the operation means,
When the user operates the operating means, an operation prompting image can be displayed on the display means,
The operation promotion image is
a first operation prompting image and a second operation prompting image which suggests that the advantageous game is more likely to be executed than the first operation prompting image;
A gaming machine that is more likely to display the second operation prompting image when the third number is displayed as the second numerical information than when the first number is displayed as the second numerical information .